© 2008 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WQ21600
En
AV Amplifier
OWNER’S MANUAL
English
RBGLE
DSP-Z7_RBGLE_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, September 17, 2008 4:00 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
2 En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press
B
MASTER ON/OFF to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the
main room, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Zone 4 and then disconnect
the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet.
19
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
..................................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the
same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are
incorrectly replaced.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by
B
MASTER ON/OFF. In
this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
Note
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be
connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
3 En
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland
Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from
whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our
website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).
The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha
undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge
for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been
discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.
Conditions
1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a
statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the
product may be returned at the customer’s expense.
2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.
3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.
4. The following are excluded from this guarantee:
a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.
b. Damage resulting from:
(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.
(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to
ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.
(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper
use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in
the country where it is used.
(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.
(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.
(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety
standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.
(7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products.
(Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or
http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.)
5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.
6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the
product.
7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.
8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising
from their sales/purchase contract.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical
and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to
applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/
EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and
prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise
arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your
local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact
your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the
requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
4 En
Features.................................................................... 7
Supplied accessories .................................................. 7
Logos and trademarks................................................ 8
Getting started......................................................... 9
Quick start guide...................................................10
Preparation: Check the items................................... 10
Step 1: Set up your speakers.................................... 11
Step 2: Connect your DVD player and
other components ........................................ 12
Step 3: Turn on the power and start playback ......... 13
Connections ........................................................... 14
Rear panel ................................................................ 14
Placing speakers ...................................................... 15
Connecting speakers ................................................ 17
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 20
Information on HDMI™.......................................... 21
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 22
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 23
Connecting other components ................................. 24
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 29
Connecting the power cable .................................... 29
Setting the speaker impedance and
display language .................................................. 30
Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 30
Front panel display .................................................. 31
Using the remote control ......................................... 32
Opening and closing the front panel door ............... 33
Optimizing the speaker setting for
your listening room ........................................... 34
Before starting the automatic setup ......................... 34
Quick automatic setup ............................................. 34
Basic automatic setup .............................................. 35
Advanced automatic setup....................................... 37
Reviewing and reloading the automatic setup
parameters ........................................................... 39
Playback ................................................................ 41
Basic procedure ....................................................... 41
Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 42
Selecting the multi-channel input component ......... 42
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack................................ 42
Using your headphones ........................................... 43
Muting the audio output .......................................... 43
Displaying the input source information ................. 43
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 44
Sound field programs ........................................... 45
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 45
Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode............................... 51
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 51
Using audio features ............................................. 52
Selecting decoders ................................................... 52
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 53
Adjusting the tonal quality ...................................... 53
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 54
Selecting the recording source................................. 54
Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 55
Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and
your Bluetooth component .................................. 55
Playback of the Bluetooth™ component................. 55
Music Content menu ............................................ 56
Music Content menu operations .............................. 56
Using iPod™.......................................................... 57
iPod menu tree ......................................................... 57
Controlling iPod™ .................................................. 58
Using USB and network features ........................ 59
USB and network menu tree.................................... 59
Navigating USB and network menus ...................... 60
Using a USB storage device or
a USB portable audio player ............................... 61
Using a PC server or Yamaha MCX-2000 .............. 61
Using the Internet Radio.......................................... 62
Using shortcut buttons ............................................. 62
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
5 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu................. 64
GUI menu overview ................................................ 66
GUI menu operations............................................... 67
Stereo/Surround ....................................................... 68
Input Select .............................................................. 73
Music Content.......................................................... 75
Setup (Speaker)........................................................ 75
Setup (Volume)........................................................ 77
Setup (Sound) .......................................................... 78
Setup (Video)........................................................... 81
Setup (HDMI).......................................................... 83
Setup (Network)....................................................... 84
Setup (Multi Zone) .................................................. 85
Setup (Option) ......................................................... 87
Language.................................................................. 90
Saving and recalling the system settings
(System Memory).............................................. 91
Saving the system settings ....................................... 91
Loading the system settings..................................... 92
Using examples........................................................ 93
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser
(Web Control Center) ...................................... 95
Remote control features ....................................... 96
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 96
Customizing the remote control............................... 98
Setting the backlight mode of the remote control.... 99
Setting remote control codes ................................... 99
Programming codes from other remote controls ... 101
Changing source names in the display window..... 102
Macro programming features ................................ 103
Clearing configurations ......................................... 105
Simplified remote control ...................................... 106
Using multi-zone configuration ......................... 107
Connecting the Zone 2,
Zone 3 and Zone 4 components ........................ 107
Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4................... 110
Using the party mode............................................. 112
Advanced setup................................................... 113
Using the advanced setup menu ............................ 113
Troubleshooting...................................................116
Resetting the system............................................126
Operation modes of front panel controls ..........127
Glossary................................................................128
Sound field program information......................131
Parametric equalizer information .....................132
Specifications .......................................................133
Index .....................................................................134
Front panel...............................................................2
Remote control ........................................................3
Sound output in each sound field program...........4
List of remote control codes ...................................6
Information about software .................................11
ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX (separate booklet)
6 En
By configuring the parameters in the GUI menu of this unit, you can adjust a variety of system settings suited for your
listening environment. The following is a brief description of some of the useful menus you can configure in the GUI
menu. For more detailed information, see “Graphical user interface (GUI) menu” (page 64).
Fine adjusting the speaker settings
In case speaker settings configured by automatic setup
does not match your listening environment, you can
configure them manually.
Setup → Speaker (page 75)
Specifying the muting type
In case you do not want to fully mute audio when you
receive a call while watching your favorite TV program,
you can use this menu to specify the muting level.
Setup → Vo l u m e → Muting Type (page 78)
Specifying the initial volume level
By adjusting this parameter, you can automatically control
the initial volume level regardless of the recording level of
the audio source.
Setup → Vo l u m e → Initial Volume (page 78)
Adjusting the dynamic range
The dynamic range is the difference between the
minimum and maximum amplitude. The higher the
dynamic range, the more accurate the sound reproduction
for bitstream signals. You can adjust the dynamic range
for speakers and headphones individually. Also, you can
use the adaptive dynamic range control feature to adjust
the dynamic range automatically in conjunction with the
volume level.
Setup → Sound → Dynamic Range (page 78)
Setup → Vo l u m e → Adaptive DRC (page 77)
Adjusting the audio and video synchronization
Sometimes, depending on your video source component,
video is delayed relative to audio due to processing
problems. In this case, you need to manually adjust the
audio delay to keep it synchronized with the video. If you
connect the video source component to this unit using an
HDMI connection and your component supports the
LIPSYNC feature, you can adjust the audio/video
synchronization automatically.
Setup → Sound → Lipsync (page 80)
Changing input/output assignment
In case the initial input/output assignments do not
correspond to your needs, you can rearrange them
according to your component to be connected to this unit.
You can also edit the input name to be displayed in the
front panel or in the GUI screen as necessary.
Setup → Option → I/O Assignment (page 87)
Setup → Option → Input Rename (page 88)
Fixing the volume difference between input
sources
The sound output level may vary depending on the audio
source components connected to this unit. In this case, you
can reduce or increase the output level of each input
source using this feature.
Input Select → (input source) → (submenu) →
Volume Trim (page 73)
Setting the background video for discrete multi-
channel input
If you want to enjoy video images in combination with
discrete multi-channel audio input, configure this setting
to specify the video input source. For example, to view
DVD video images while listening to the music sources
from a multi-format player or an external decoder, set this
setting to “DVD”.
Input Select → MULTI CH → (submenu) →
BGV (page 74)
Adjusting the brightness of the front panel
display
You can make the front panel display darker or brighter by
configuring this setting.
Setup → Option → Display Set → Front Panel Display →
Dimmer (page 88)
Turning on or off the short message display
Each time you operate this unit using controls on the front
panel or remote control keys, this unit displays short
messages on the video monitor. If you want to turn off the
short message display, select “Off” in this setting (Initial
factory setting is “On”).
Setup → Option → Display Set →
Short Message (page 88)
Setting the amount of time to display GUI screen
information
You can set the amount of time to display playback
information in the GUI screen after you perform a certain
operation.
Setup → Option → Display Set →
Playback Screen (page 88)
Protecting the setup values
After you have configured the sound field program
parameters and other system settings, you can use this
feature to prevent accidental changes to those setup
values.
Setup → Option → Memory Guard (page 87)
What you can do with the GUI menu
FEATURES
7 En
INTRODUCTION
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 140 W + 140 W
Center: 140 W
Surround: 140 W + 140 W
Surround back: 140 W + 140 W
Various input/output connectors
◆
HDMI (IN x 5, OUT x 2), Component video (IN x 3, OUT x 1),
S-video (IN x 6, OUT x 3), Composite video (IN x 6, OUT x 5),
Coaxial digital audio (IN x 3), Optical digital audio
(IN x 5, OUT x 2), Analog audio (IN x 11, OUT x 3)
◆ Speaker out (7-channel), Pre out (7-channel), Subwoofer out,
Presence out, Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 out
◆ Discrete multi-channel input (6 or 8-channel)
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ CINEMA DSP 3D
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
Digital audio decoders
◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
decoder
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ DTS NEO:6 decoder
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio
based on HDMI version 1.3a (HDMI is licensed by HDMI
Licensing, LLC.)
– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
information capability
– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability
– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability
– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals
capability
– High definition digital audio format signals capability
◆ HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System)
licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI
digital video) capability for monitor out
◆ Analog and HDMI video up/down: 480i(576i) → 480p(576p)/
720p/1080i/1080p, 480p(576p) → 720p/1080i/1080p, 720p
→ 480p(576p)/1080i/1080p, 1080i → 480p(576p)/720p/
1080p, 1080p → 480p(576p)/720p/1080i
◆ HDMI image quality adjustment feature
DOCK terminal
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately)
USB and network features
◆ USB port to connect a USB storage device, USB Hard disc
drive, or USB portable audio player
◆ NETWORK port to connect a PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or
access the Internet Radio via LAN
◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
◆ Web control capability of this unit by using a Web browser
Automatic speaker setup features
◆ Advanced YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic
Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup
◆ Multi-point measurement feature for multiple listening
positions
◆ Speaker angle measurement feature
◆ Parametric equalizer select feature
Other features
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ GUI (graphic user interface) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ Music Content menu that allows you to easily navigate music
content menus of your iPod, USB component, Internet Radio,
etc.
◆ PURE DIRECT mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability
◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and
macro capability
◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3/ZONE 4 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and
ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 using ZONE CONTROLS
◆ System Memory capability for saving and recalling multiple
system parameter settings
◆ Sleep timer for each zone
Check that you received all of the following parts.
❏ Remote control
❏ Simplified remote control
❏ Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03, UM-4)
❏ Power cable (Two for Asia model)
❏ Optimizer microphone
❏ Microphone base
Features
Supplied accessories
Features
8 En
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535
& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and
DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This amplifier supports network connections.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
The Certified For Windows Vista logo, Windows Media and the
Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Content providers are using the digital rights management
technology for Windows Media contained in this device
(WMDRM) to protect the integrity of their content (Secure
Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in
such content is not misappropriated.
This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content
(WM-DRM Software).
If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been
compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure Content
Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM
Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or
play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM
Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked
WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you
download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a
PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also
download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure
Content Owners.
Logos and trademarks
iPod
TM
GETTING STARTED
9 En
INTRODUCTION
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the four supplied batteries
(AAA, LR03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the transmit indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code
and program any acquired functions that may have been
cleared.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
Getting started
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
•“
B
MASTER ON/OFF” or “
3
DVD” (example)
indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the
remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or “Appendix”
(separate booklet) for the information about each position
of the parts.
1
3
2
Notes
Caution
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE
plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may
cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire
hazard.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or
counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight
slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
..........................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
230-
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Voltage indication
QUICK START GUIDE
10 En
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.
In these steps, you need the following supplied
accessories.
❏ Power cable
The following items are not included in the package of this
unit.
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2
❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1
❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 4
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
The priority of the requirement of other speakers is
as follows:
1. Two surround speakers
2. One center speaker
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 7
❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor .......................................... x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2
Select RCA composite video cables.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1
Quick start guide
Front right
speaker
Subwoofer
Surround back
right speaker
Surround left
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround back left
speaker
Surround right
speaker
Center
speaker
Video monitor
DVD player
Enjoy DVD playback!
Step 1: Set up your speakers
☞
P. 11
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
Step 3: Turn on the power and
start playback
☞
P. 12
☞
P. 13
Preparation: Check the items
Quick start guide
11 En
INTRODUCTION
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.
2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
3 Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal
part of this unit.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Front speakers and center speaker
Surround and surround back speakers
4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and
the input jack of the subwoofer.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
AC IN
SPEAKERS
CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SINGLE
NETWORK USB
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
REMOTE
PHONO
GND
CD TV
HDMI
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
DOCK
DIGITAL INPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
PRE OUT
TRIGGER OUT
RS-232C
DIGITAL OUTPUT
ZONE OUT
SUB SUR.BACK
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
CENTERZONE 4 OUT
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
ZONE 3 ZONE
VIDEO
CD
D
V
D
D
V
R
COAXIAL
1
2
TV
BD/
HD DVD
CBL/
SAT
MD/
CD-R
DVD ZONE 4
OPTICAL
87
65
4
321
(8CH)
DVD
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/CD-RTUNER
BD/HD DVD
VCR
DVR
CBL/SAT
OUT OUT
ININ
BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
IN 1 2
OUT IN OUT
DVR
CBL/
SAT
OUT
1
OUT
2
+
A B C
R
R
L
R
L
+
R
L
+
+
R
L
+
R
L
+
R
L
L
IN1
IN3
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
IN2
IN4
SP1
SP2
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Speaker terminals
12 3 4
12 3 4
To the front left
speaker
To the front right
speaker
Loosen Insert
To the center
speaker
Tighten
To the surround
back
right speaker
To the surround
right speaker
To the surround back
left speaker
To the surround left
speaker
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Input jack
AV amplifierSubwoofer
Subwoofer cable
Quick start guide
12 En
1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack of this unit.
2 Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack of your DVD player and
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.
3 Connect the video cable to the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video
input jack of your video monitor.
4 Connect the supplied power cable to this unit
and then plug of the power cable and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
y
For details about connecting the power cable, see page 29.
■ For other connections
• Other speaker combinations ☞ P. 17
• Information on jacks and cable plugs ☞ P. 20
• Information on HDMI™ ☞ P. 21
• TV monitor or projector ☞ P. 23
• Other components ☞ P. 24
• External amplifier ☞ P. 26
• Multi-format player or external decoder ☞ P. 27
• Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞ P. 27
•Network ☞ P. 28
• USB device ☞ P. 28
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
AC IN
SPEAKERS
CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SINGLE
NETWORK USB
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
REMOTE
PHONO
GND
CD TV
HDMI
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
DOCK
DIGITAL INPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
PRE OUT
TRIGGER OUT
RS-232C
DIGITAL OUTPUT
ZONE OUT
SUB SUR.BACK
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
CENTERZONE 4 OUT
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
ZONE 3 ZONE
VIDEO
CD
D
V
D
D
V
R
COAXIAL
1
2
TV
BD/
HD DVD
CBL/
SAT
MD/
CD-R
DVD ZONE 4
OPTICAL
87
65
4
321
(8CH)
DVD
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/CD-RTUNER
BD/HD DVD
VCR
DVR
CBL/SAT
OUT OUT
ININ
BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
IN 1 2
OUT IN OUT
DVR
CBL/
SAT
OUT
1
OUT
2
+
A B C
R
R
L
R
L
+
R
L
+
+
R
L
+
R
L
+
R
L
L
IN1
IN3
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
IN2
IN4
SP1
SP2
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC
wall outlets.
VIDEO MONITOR OUTDVD VIDEO
DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL
Digital coaxial
audio output
jack
Digital coaxial audio
cable
DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL jack
DVD player
AV amplifier
Composite video
output jack
Video cable
DVD VIDEO jack
DVD player
AV amplifier
Video monitor
AV amplifier
Video cable
VIDEO MONITOR
OUT jack
Video input jack
Quick start guide
13 En
INTRODUCTION
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press BMASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position on the front panel.
3 Rotate the
I
INPUT selector to set the input
source to “DVD”.
4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.
5 Rotate
M
VOLUME to adjust the volume.
6 To set this unit to the standby mode, press
AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.
y
For details about turning on/off this unit and the standby
mode, see page 30.
■ For other operations
• Optimizing the speaker parameters
automatically ☞ P. 34
• Basic playback operations ☞ P. 41
• Sound field programs ☞ P. 45
• Pure high-fidelity sounds ☞ P. 53
• Bluetooth component playback ☞ P. 55
• iPod playback ☞ P. 57
• Playback via USB or network ☞ P. 59
Step 3: Turn on the power and start
playback
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER
IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 30).
You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers
(page 113).
14 En
The RS-232C terminal is a control expansion terminal for
factory use only. Consult your dealer for details.
Connections
Rear panel
AC IN
SPEAKERS
CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SINGLE
NETWORK USB
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
REMOTE
PHONO
GND
CD TV
HDMI
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUD IO
DOCK
DIGITAL INPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
PRE OUT
TRIGGER OUT
RS-232C
DIGITAL OUTPUT
ZONE OUT
SUB SUR.BACK
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
CENTERZONE 4 OUT
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
ZONE 3 ZONE
VIDEO
CD
D
V
D
D
V
R
COAXIAL
1
2
TV
BD/
HD DVD
CBL/
SAT
MD/
CD-R
DVD ZONE 4
OPTICAL
87
65
4
321
(8CH)
DVD
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/CD-RTUNER
BD/HD DVD
VCR
DVR
CBL/SAT
OUT OUT
ININ
BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
IN 1 2
OUT IN OUT
DVR
CBL/
SAT
OUT
1
OUT
2
+
A B C
R
R
L
R
L
+
R
L
+
+
R
L
+
R
L
+
R
L
L
IN1
IN3
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
IN2
IN4
SP1
SP2
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
AB0
9
C
231458
76
Name Page
1 HDMI jacks 21
2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 20
3 Audio component jacks 20
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 27, 107
4 Video component jacks 20
5 NETWORK port 28
6 USB port 28
7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
9
8 AC IN 29
AC OUTLET(S) 29
9 DOCK terminal 27
0 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks 20
A TRIGGER OUT jacks 109
B RS-232C terminal —
C MULTI CH INPUT jacks 27
PRE OUT jacks 26
ZONE OUT jacks 107
Speaker terminals 17
Note
15 En
Connections
PREPARATION
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend.
y
• 7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback of the high definition digital audio sources (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD
Master Audio, etc.) with sound field programs.
• We recommend that you add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program.
• The surround back speakers and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously.
7.1-channel speaker layout (plus presence speakers)
6.1-channel speaker layout
5.1-channel speaker layout
Placing speakers
FR
FL
SBR
SBL
SL
SR
C
SW
PL
PR
60˚
30˚
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
PL
PR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
30 cm (12 in) or more
60˚
30˚
SB
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
FR
FL
SB
SL
SR
C
SW
FR
FL
SL
SR
SW
C
60˚
30˚
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
16 En
Connections
■ Speaker types
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds.
For 5.1-channel speaker layout, place these speakers
farther back compared with the placement in the 7.1-
channel speaker layout.
Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and
SBR)/Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back
transitions.
For 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel signals are mixed down and output at the
single surround back speaker by configuring the
“Surround Back” setting (page 76).
For 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel signals are output at the surround left and
right speakers by configuring the “Surround Back” setting
(page 76).
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from
any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high
fidelity sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
included in bitstreams and multi-channel PCM sources.
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because
low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better
to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall
reflections.
■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and
PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the
front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the
sound field programs (page 45). We recommend that you
use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA
DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers,
connect the speakers to SP1 speaker terminals and then set
“Front Presence” to “Yes” (page 76).
For other speaker combinations
You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field
programs by using a speaker combination other than
the 7.1/6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations.
Use the automatic setup feature (page 34) or set the
“Speaker” parameters (page 75). to output the surround
sounds at the connected speakers.
FR
PRPL
C
FL
1.8 m (6 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
17 En
Connections
PREPARATION
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the
plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit
automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field
programs.
■ 7.1-channel speaker connection
Connecting speakers
Caution
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (page 30).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could
damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 30).
You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (page 113).
Notes
SPEAKERS
CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SINGLE
+
R
L
+
R
L
+
+
R
L
+
R
L
+
R
L
SP1
SP2
SUB
WOOFER
Front speakers Surround speakers
Presence speakers
(page 16) or
Zone 2/Zone 3
speakers
(page 107)
Subwoofer
Right
Center speaker
Surround back speakers
Left
Left
LeftRightRight
Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers
(page 107)
18 En
Connections
■ 6.1-channel speaker connection
■ 5.1-channel speaker connection
Surround back speaker
SPEAKERS
CENTERPRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SINGLE
L
+
R
L
+
+
R
L
+
R
L
+
R
L
SP1
SP2
SUB
WOOFER
Surround speakers
Front speakers
Presence speakers
(page 16) or
Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers
(page 107)
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Left
Left
Right Right
Zone 2/Zone 3
speakers
(page 107)
SPEAKERS
CENTERSURROUND BACK/BI-AMP PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2/ZONE 3
SINGLE
+
R
L
+
R
L
+
+
R
L
+
R
L
+
R
L
SP1
SP2
SUB
WOOFER
Surround speakersFront speakers
Subwoofer
Center speaker
LeftLeft
Right
Right
Zone 2/Zone 3
speakers (page 107)
Front speakers for the
bi-amplification
connections
(page 19)
Presence speakers
(page 16) or
Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers
(page 107)
19 En
Connections
PREPARATION
■ Connecting the speaker cable
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.
2 Loosen the knob, insert one bare wire into
the hole and then tighten the knob.
■ Connecting the banana plug
(Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea
models)
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
into the end of the terminal.
■ Using bi-amplification connections
You can make bi-amplification connections to one speaker
system which supports bi-amplification connection as
shown below. To activate the connections, configure the
“BI-AMP” setting (page 114).
When you make the conventional connection with the speakers,
make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals of the
speakers appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the
speakers for details.
10 mm (0.4 in)
Loosen Insert Tighten
Banana plug
Caution
Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to
separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)
crossovers.
Note
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
FRONT
SINGLE
+
R
L
+
R
L
This unit
LeftRight
Front speakers
20 En
Connections
This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection
method depending on the component to be connected.
■ Audio jacks
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with up to 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
■ Video jacks
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
y
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function.
(page 22)
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Note
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
(Red)(White) (Orange)
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
R
P
B
P
PB
Y
P
R
S
V
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
(Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
21 En
Connections
PREPARATION
This unit has four HDMI input jacks and two HDMI output jacks for digital audio and video signal input/output.
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
y
• We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI cable
shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
↔
DVI-D jack) to connect this
unit to other DVI components.
• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection
(page 43).
• If you set “Mode” in “Standby Through” to “Last” or “Fix”, this
unit allows the HDMI signals input at an HDMI IN jack to pass
through this unit and output at an HDMI OUT jack (page 83).
• This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks. You can select
the active HDMI OUT jack(s) (page 42).
• This unit is equipped with the video conversion function (page 22).
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jacks of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• The HDMI OUT jacks output the audio signals input at the
HDMI input jacks only.
• If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT
jacks via a DVI connection, the connection may fail.
■ HDMI signal compatibility with this unit
Audio signals
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio
signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources
with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the following
connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (page 27)
– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the instruction manuals of the input source component,
and set the component appropriately.
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and
audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD
player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
• To decode the audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input
source component appropriately so that the component outputs the
audio bitstream signals directly (does not decode the bitstream
signals on the component).
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for
example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of
Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio
commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the
following resolutions:
– 480i/60 Hz
– 576i/50 Hz
– 480p/60 Hz
– 576p/50 Hz
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24Hz
Compatibility with Deep Color and x.v.Color
video signals
This unit accepts Deep Color (30 or 36-bit) and x.v.Color
video signals. To output those video signals from the
HDMI OUT jacks without any processing, set “HDMI `
HDMI” (page 82) to “Through”.
If the video monitor is not compatible with Deep Color or
x.v.Color video signals, the video source may not be played
back correctly.
■ Default input assignment of HDMI input
jacks
Information on HDMI™
Notes
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
media
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch,
2.8224 MHz,1 bit
SA-CD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High
definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD,
Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master
Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution
Audio
Blu-ray Disc,
HD DVD, etc.
HDMI
HDMI cable plug
Notes
Note
HDMI input jack Assigned input source
IN1 BD/HD DVD
IN2 DVD
IN3 CBL/SAT
IN4 DVR
Front HDMI IN jack V-AUX
22 En
Connections
■ Audio signal flow
Only the HDMI input jacks support multi-channel PCM, DSD,
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio and
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signal inputs.
■ Video signal flow
y
• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless
video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080p-
resolution analog video signals are being input.
• To set the analog-to-analog video conversion or change the
other video settings, configure the “Video” parameters
(page 81).
• If different analog video signals are input concurrently, the
following priority order will be applied:
(1) COMPONENT VIDEO, (2) S VIDEO, (3) VIDEO
Audio and video signal flow
Note
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
HDMI
AUDIO
OutputInput
Analog
Digital
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
Through
OutputInput
Video
conversion
23 En
Connections
PREPARATION
If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT
jacks via a DVI connection, the connection may fail. In this
case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
y
• To select the types of the audio signals output at the HDMI
OUT jacks, configure the “Audio Output” setting (page 84).
• To assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/ZONE
OUT) jacks to the main zone or another zone, configure the
“Component Assign” setting (page 85).
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Note
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
TV
AUD IO
OUT
1
OUT
2
DIGITAL INPUT
TV
4
PRPB
V
S
Y
L R
O
TV
Optical outComponent video in
Video inAudio out
S-video in
HDMI in
Recommended connections Alternative connections
HDMI in
Projector
24 En
Connections
■ Connecting audio and video components
This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection
method depending on the component to be connected.
y
HDMI can transmit both digital audio and video over a single HDMI cable.
Connection example (connecting a DVD player)
Connecting other components
DVD
BD/HD DVD
VCR
DVR
CBL/SAT
OUT OUT
ININ
VIDEO
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/CD-RTUNER
R
L
BD/HD DVD DVD CBL/SAT
Y
P
R
P
B
A B C
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVR
CBL/
SAT
IN1
IN3
DVD
BD/
HD DVD
IN2
IN4
HDMI
PHONO
GND
CD
R
L
TV
CD
D
VD
D
V
R
COAXIAL
BD/
HD DVD
CBL/
SAT
MD/
CD-R
DVD
87
65
321
TV
4
OPTICAL
HDMI jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO
AUDIO COAXIAL OPTICAL
Video jacks
Audio jacks
DVD
VIDEO
D
V
D
COAXIAL
DVD
OPTICAL
6
2
DIGITAL INPUT
DVD
Y
P
R
P
B
B
DVD
IN2
HDMI
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
L
C
O
V
S
L R
PRPBY
DVD player
HDMI out
Coaxial out
Component out
S-video
out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out
Recommended
connections
Alternative
connections
25 En
Connections
PREPARATION
Jacks used for audio and video connections
Recommended connections are indicated by boldface. When connecting a recording component, you need to make
additional connections for recording (signal transmission from this unit to the recording component).
y
You can also use the VIDEO AUX jacks (page 29) on the front panel to connect an additional component.
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
Component Signal type
Jacks to connect
On component On this unit
Blu-ray Disc or HD
DVD player
Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN1 (BD/HD DVD)
Audio Optical out OPTICAL (BD/HD DVD)
Audio out (analog) AUDIO (BD/HD DVD)
Video Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)
S-video out S VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)
Video out (composite) VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)
DVD player Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN2 (DVD)
Audio Optical out OPTICAL (DVD)
Coaxial out COAXIAL (DVD)
Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVD)
Video Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (DVD)
S-video out S VIDEO (DVD)
Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVD)
Set-top box Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN3 (CBL/SAT)
Audio Optical out OPTICAL (CBL/SAT)
Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CBL/SAT)
Video Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (CBL/SAT)
S-video out S VIDEO (CBL/SAT)
Video out (composite) VIDEO (CBL/SAT)
DVD recorder Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN4 (DVR)
Audio Coaxial out COAXIAL (DVR)
Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVR IN)
Video S-video out S VIDEO (DVR IN)
Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVR IN)
Audio recording Audio in (analog) AUDIO (DVR OUT)
Video recording S-video in S VIDEO (DVR OUT)
Video in (composite) VIDEO (DVR OUT)
26 En
Connections
• Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV if the video conversion is disabled. For example, if you
connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect other components to the VIDEO jacks.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
• If you connect your DVD player to both the OPTICAL and COAXIAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL
jack.
• GUI signals are not output at the DVR OUT and VCR OUT jacks and cannot be recorded.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default one assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack, configure the “I/O Assignment” setting (page 87).
• When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jack, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head
amplifier.
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.
■ Connecting an external amplifier
This unit has more than enough power for any home use.
However, if you want to add more power to the speaker
output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an
external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT
jack outputs the same channel signals as the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not
make any connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer.
[1] CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
[2] FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
[3] SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
VCR Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (VCR IN)
Video S-video out S VIDEO (VCR IN)
Video out (composite) VIDEO (VCR IN)
Audio recording Audio in (analog) AUDIO (VCR OUT)
Video recording S-video in S VIDEO (VCR OUT)
Video in (composite) VIDEO (VCR OUT)
CD player Audio Coaxial out COAXIAL (CD)
Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CD)
MD or CD recorder Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (MD/CD-R IN)
Audio recording Optical in OPTICAL (MD/CD-R)
Audio in (analog) AUDIO (MD/CD-R OUT)
Tuner Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (TUNER)
Turn table Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (PHONO)
Notes
Component Signal type
Jacks to connect
On component On this unit
Notes
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
R
L
[1] [2]
[5]
[3] [4]
27 En
Connections
PREPARATION
[4] SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks
Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.
y
• To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set
“Front Presence” to “None” and “Surround Back” to any
parameter except “None” (page 76).
• To output presence channel signals at these jacks, set “Front
Presence” to “Yes” and “Surround Back” to “None” (page 76).
[5] SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
■ Connecting a multi-format player or an
external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a
multi-format player, external decoder, etc. If you set
“Input Channels” to “8ch” (page 74), the analog audio
input jacks assigned as “Front Input” can be used as the
front channel input jacks.
• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital
sound field processor is automatically disabled.
• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at
least a 5.1-channel speaker system when using this feature.
* The analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in
“MULTI CH” (page 74).
■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
dock or Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately).
Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth
receiver to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this
unit using its dedicated cable.
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
When the components are the Yamaha products and have
the capability of the transmission of the remote control
signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT
jacks to the remote control input and output jack with the
monaural analog mini cable as follows.
* You can connect another set of infrared signal receiver and
Yamaha component to the REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks same as
the REMOTE IN/OUT 1 jacks.
Notes
MULTI CH INPUT
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
(8CH)
TAPE
MD/
(C)
()
R
L
LR
LRLR
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Front out (8ch)
Subwoofer out
Center out
Surround out
Front out (6ch)
Surround back
out (8ch)
*
DOCK
Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver
REMOTE
IN 1 2
OUT IN OUT
Yamaha
component
(CD or DVD
player, etc.)
Remote
control in
Remote
control out
Infrared signal
receiver or
Yama ha
component
*
28 En
Connections
■ Connecting to the network
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the
NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this
unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and Yamaha MCX-
2000, access the Internet Radio, or control this unit by using your PC, each device must be connected properly in the
network.
• You must use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to connect a network hub or router and this unit.
• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (page 84).
• Yamaha MCX-2000, MCX-A10 and MCX-C15 may not be for sale in some locations.
■ Connecting USB storage devices
Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel or rear panel of this unit.
Set “USB Select” to “Front” (default) or “Rear” to select the active USB port (page 61).
Notes
NETWORK
LAN
WAN
Router
PC
Modem
Yamaha MCX-2000
Internet
Yamaha MCX-C15
Yamaha MCX-A10
(with optional
speakers)
Network cable
VOLUME
HDMI IN
USB
VIDEO AUX
INFO
USB
USB memory device or USB
portable audio player
USB storage device
(Front panel) (Rear panel)
29 En
Connections
PREPARATION
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit. To reproduce
the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as
the input source.
■ Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after
all other connections are complete, then plug the AC
power cable into an AC wall outlet.
(Asia model only) Select one of the supplied power cables
suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location before
plugging this unit into the AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
Korea model ............................................................... None
Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For
information on the maximum power or the total power
consumption of the components that can be connected to
these outlet(s), see “Specifications” (page 133).
The rated power of the component (such as a subwoofer)
connected to these outlet(s) cannot exceed the maximum power
supplied by this unit.
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
components before making connections.
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
LEVEL
MULTI ZONE
MIC
OPTIMIZER
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT
PROGRAM
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MENU ENTER
NEXT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
1
ZONE 2
2
SYSTEM MEMORY
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
3
ZONE 4
4
INFO
ZONE CONTROLS
TONE
CONTROL
VIDEO AUX
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
O
V
S
L
R
Game console or
video camera
S-Video output
Video output
Audio output
Optical output
HDMI output
Connecting the power cable
Note
Note
AC IN
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
To the AC wall outlet
30 En
Connections
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
2 Press and hold KSTRAIGHT on the front
panel and then press
B
MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the
J
PROGRAM selector to select
“SPEAKER IMP.”.
4 Press
K
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“6Ω MIN”.
5 Rotate the
J
PROGRAM selector to select
“LANGUAGE”.
6 Press
K
STRAIGHT to select desired
language setting for the GUI screen in the
video monitor.
Choices: English (English), (Japanese),
Français (French), Deutsch (German),
Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)
• For details about the display language, see “Language”
(page 115)
• You can also select the display language with the GUI menu
(page 90).
7 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to save the new
setting and turn off this unit.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
■ Turning on this unit
Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
inward to the ON position.
When you turn on this unit by pressing
B
MASTER ON/
OFF, the main zone is turned on.
■ Turning off this unit
Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
again to release it outward to the OFF position.
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
(or
D
STANDBY
).
■ Turning on the main zone from the
standby mode
Press
A
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or
E
POWER).
y
• Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn
off this unit. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small
amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the
remote control.
• Even when this unit is in the standby mode, power consumption
increases if “Standby Through” (page 83) or “Network
Standby” (page 85) is on. If you do not use this unit for long
periods of time, turn off this unit by pressing BMASTER ON/
OFF to minimize power consumption.
• AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF, DSTANDBY and EPOWER are
operational only when BMASTER ON/OFF is pressed
inward to the ON position.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few
seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.
Setting the speaker impedance
and display language
Caution
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER
IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this
unit. You can also use 4 ohm speakers as the front
speakers (page 113).
Notes
Note
MASTER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
While holding
down
Turning this unit on and off
If there are some problems…
• First, turn off and then turn on this unit again.
• If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this
unit (page 126).
31 En
Connections
PREPARATION
a Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (page 43).
b Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
• The R indicator on the right side of the USB indicator lights up
when “USB Select” is set to “Rear” (page 75).
• The NET indicator also lights up when “Network Standby”
(page 85) is set to “On” and this unit is in the standby mode.
c Input signal indicators
The respective indicator lights up when this unit is
reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse
Code Modulation), WMA (Windows Media Audio) or,
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) audio signals.
d Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
e HDMI indicator
IN indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source
is input at one of the HDMI input jacks (page 21).
OUT 1/OUT 2 indicator
The respective indicator lights up when the HDMI
signal is output at the HDMI OUT jacks. (page 21).
f ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (page 50).
g YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run the automatic setup and when the
speaker settings configured by the automatic setup are
used without any modifications (page 34).
h PRESET indicator
Lights up while this unit is in the preset tuning mode.
i DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound
field programs are selected.
SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a
sound field program is selected (page 50).
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
field program (page 45).
3D indicator
Lights up when the CINEMA DSP 3D mode is turned
on (page 51).
VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 50).
j ADAPTIVE DRC indicator
Lights up when the adaptive dynamic range control
feature is turned on (page 77).
k Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit function.
l Menu browsing indicator
Lights up if any items exist under the current item during
menu browsing for iPod, etc.
m SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (page 44).
n PRE AMP indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the pre-amplifier mode
(page 114).
Front panel display
VOLUME
dB
ZONE2
SLEEP
ZONE3
PRE
ZONE4
AMP
USB
NET
MASTER AUDIO
MATRIX
DISCRETE
SILENT
CINEMA
YPAO PRESET
ENHANCER
IN
VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC
HD
96
24
q
DIGITAL PLUS
q
TRUE HD
q
EX
q
PL x
3
DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
R
L C R
SL LFE SR
SBL SB SBR
DSD
PCM
WMA
MP3
OUT 1 OUT 2
VOLUME
dB
ZONE2
SLEEP
ZONE3
PRE
ZONE4
AMP
L C R
SL LFE SR
SBL SB SBR
YPAO PRESET
MASTER AUDIO
MATRIX
DISCRETE
SILENT
CINEMA
ENHANCER
VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC
HD
96
24
q
DIGITAL PLUS
q
TRUE HD
q
EX
q
PL x
3
OUT 1 OUT 2
IN
q
c
ab
p
o
i
h
g
j
k
n
m
l
e
f
d
Notes
32 En
Connections
o VOLUME level indicator
• Indicates the current volume level.
• Flashes while the mute function is on (page 43).
p Input channel and speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
• Indicate the channel components of the current
digital input signal.
• Light up or flash according to the settings of the
speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup
procedure (page 34).
Presence speaker indicators
Light up according to setting for “Front Presence”
(page 76) in “Configuration” when this unit is in the
auto setup procedure (page 34) or the speaker level
setting procedure in the “Level” (page 77).
q ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators
Lights up when Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4 is turned on
(page 110).
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
6LIGHT
Lights up the remote control buttons and the display
window (4).
Display window (4)
[1] ID1/ID2 indicator
Indicates the currently selected remote control ID
(page 114).
[2] Transmit indicator
Appears while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
[3] Zone indicators
Indicates the currently controlling zone (page 110).
[4] Information display
Shows the name of the selected input source that you
can control.
Infrared window (1)
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
L C R
SL LFE SR
SBL SB SBR
Presence speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Using the remote control
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDIO
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MULTI
ZONE
STRAIGHT TUNING MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
MEMORY FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
EFFECT DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO
CATEGORY
SEARCH MODE
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
R
L
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE 2
30 30
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
Remote control sensor
MAIN
ZONE 2
ID 2ID 1
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
33 En
Connections
PREPARATION
Operation mode selector (F)
The function of some buttons depends on the operation
mode selector position.
AMP
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (page 97).
TV
Operates the TV (page 96).
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following
conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 99.
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel
door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of
the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these
controls.
Notes
Opening and closing the front
panel door
34 En
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
This unit is equipped with various automatic setup features. You can select the automatic setup features according to your
preference.
Quick automatic setup (page 34)
Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup without using the GUI screen.
Basic automatic setup (page 35)
Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for one listening position. You can also select the parameters to be
optimized by the automatic setup.
Advanced automatic setup (page 37)
Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for multiple listening positions. You can also select the parameters to be
optimized by the automatic setup.
Make sure of the following check points before
starting the automatic setup operations.
❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.
❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
❏ This unit is turned on.
❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
❏ The crossover frequency controls of the
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.
❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.
❏ Set the operation mode selector on the remote
control to FAMP.
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the automatic setup procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the automatic setup procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
Use this feature to carry out the automatic setup without
using the GUI screen.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
The following screen appears in the front panel
display.
“View GUI Menu” appears if the GUI menu screen is
turned on. In this case, press IMENU to turn off the GUI
menu screen or follow “Basic automatic setup” (page 35)
2 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
Before starting the automatic
setup
Notes
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
Controls of a subwoofer (example)
Quick automatic setup
Note
LEVEL
MULTI ZONE
MIC
OPTIMIZER
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT
PROGRAM
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
VIDEO AUX
AUDI O
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MENU ENTER
NEXT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
1
ZONE 2
2
SYSTEM MEMORY
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
3
ZONE 4
4
INFO
ZONE CONTROLS
TONE
CONTROL
Omni-directional
microphone
AUTO SETUP
ENTER TO START
35 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
PREPARATION
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears
would be when you are seated in your listening position.
You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the
optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.).
3 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement.
This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds.
y
• To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER
again.
• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous
screen, press ?RETURN and then 9ENTER.
Loud test tones are output from each speaker during
the measurement. Once all items are measured,
“COMPLETED” appears.
If an error or warning message appears, see “Automatic
setup” (page 124).
4 Disconnect the optimizer microphone to
complete the automatic setup.
y
You can check the results of the measurements by using
the GUI screen (page 39).
Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for one
listening position. You can also select the parameters to be
optimized in the automatic setup.
1 Turn on the video monitor and then follow
steps 1 and 2 in “Quick automatic setup”
(page 34).
2 Press IMENU on the remote control.
The following screen (GUI menu) appears in the
video monitor.
3 To select the parameters to be optimized,
press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then
press 9h.
When you do not need to select the parameters to be
optimized, skip to step 6.
y
If you do not select the parameters to be optimized, this
unit will optimize the parameters you selected last time.
All the parameters except “Angle” are selected by the
initial factory settings.
4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter and then press 9ENTER to
check or uncheck the box.
Check the boxes for the parameters to be optimized.
Before proceeding next operation
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the
automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the automatic
setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. For
more accurate measurements, we recommended that you get out
of the room or move to the wall where speakers are not around
during the measurement. It takes approximately 3 minutes.
Note
Optimizer microphone
COMPLETED
PLS UNPLUG MIC
ERROR: E-01
PRESS ENTER
Basic automatic setup
Parameter Descriptions
Multi Measure
(Multiple point
measurement)
You can optimize the setup of this unit for
multiple listening positions. For details, see
“Advanced automatic setup” (page 37). In
the basic automatic setup, leave this setting
to the default.
Wiring
(Speaker wiring)
This unit checks and adjusts which speakers
are connected and the polarity of each
speaker.
Distance
(Speaker distance)
This unit checks and adjusts the distance of
each speaker from the listening position and
adjusts the timing of each channel.
Size
(Speaker size)
This unit checks and adjusts the frequency
response of each speaker and sets the
appropriate low-frequency crossover for
each channel.
Information
Setup Menu
Start
NOTICE
Loud test tones are
output.
Please keep quiet
or leave the room.
Start:ENTER
36 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
5 If you have finished the settings, press 9l
to return to the previous menu level and then
press 9n to select “Start”.
6 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement.
This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds.
y
• To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER
again.
• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous
screen, press ?RETURN and then 9ENTER.
Loud test tones are output from each speaker during
the measurement.
If you have selected “Angle” in step 4, the following
screen appears. Proceed to step 7.
If you have not selected “Angle” in step 4,
“Measurement Completed Successful” appears once
all items are measured. Skip to step 11.
If an error or warning message appears, see “Error and
warning messages” (page 37).
7 Place the supplied microphone base at the
position you will be seated most frequently.
Make sure that the arrow on the microphone base
points the center speaker or about the midpoint
between the front left and right speakers.
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
microphone base at the same height as your ears would be
when you are seated in your listening position. You can
use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the
microphone base to the tripod (etc.).
8 Place the optimizer microphone to the
position “1” on the microphone base and
then press 9ENTER.
This unit starts the measurement of the speaker
angles.
9 Move the optimizer microphone to the
position “2” on the microphone base and
then press 9ENTER.
Equalizing
(Speaker
equalizing)
Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the
specified frequency bands. This unit
automatically selects the crucial frequency
bands for the listening room and adjusts the
level of the selected frequency bands to
create a cohesive sound field in the room.
Level
(Speaker level)
This unit checks and adjusts the volume
level of each speaker.
Angle
(Speaker angle)
Checks the angles of the front speakers,
surround speakers, and front presence
speakers.
Before proceeding next operation
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the
automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the
automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on
this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended
that you get out of the room or move to the wall where
speakers are not around during the measurement. It takes
approximately 3 minutes.
Parameter Descriptions
1
3
2
Equalizing
Level
Angle Check
Angle
Result
Put the microphone at
1st listening position
Next:ENTER
[ ]
Angle Check
Angle
Result
Measurement Completed
Successful
Detail:
Exit:ENTER
Note
Note
Pre Check
Main Check
Wiring
Retry
Exit Detail
E09:User Cancel
FRONT
DIRECTION
Microphone base
37 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
PREPARATION
10 Move the optimizer microphone to the
position “3” on the microphone base and
then press 9ENTER.
“Measurement Completed Successful” appears once
all items are measured.
11 Press 9ENTER to exit from the “Result”
screen.
y
To view the measurement results in detail, press 9h.
Press 9k / n repeatedly to toggle between parameters
(page 35). Press 9l to return to the “Result” screen.
12 Press 9l to select “Yes” to save the
measurement results or 9h to select “No”
to discard them.
13 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu and
disconnect the optimizer microphone.
■ Error and warning messages
If an error or warning message appears during the
automatic setup procedure, carry out one of the following
operations. For details on each message, see “Automatic
setup” (page 124).
• To view the details on the error and warning messages,
press 9h. Press 9k / n to display the previous/next
page (if available). Press 9l to return to the previous
menu level.
• To return to the GUI menu, press 9l.
• To retry the measurement, press 9k.
• To ignore the message and continue the process, press
9n.
Some operations cannot be performed depending on the type of
error (or warning).
Use this feature to optimize the setup of this unit for
multiple listening positions. You can also select the
parameters to be optimized by the automatic setup.
1 Turn on the video monitor and then connect
the optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER
MIC jack on the front panel.
2 Place the optimizer microphone at the first
listening position.
The following illustration shows how to place the
optimizer microphone in order to optimize the setup
of this unit for seven listening positions for example.
1
/2/3/4/5/6/7: Listening positions
3 Press IMENU on the remote control.
The GUI menu appears in the video monitor.
4 Press 9k to select “Setup Menu” and then
press 9h.
5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select
“Multi Measure” and then press 9h.
Note
Advanced automatic setup
1 7
2 6
43 5
Information
Setup Menu
Start
Multi Measure 1
Wiring
Distance
38 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
6 Press 9k / n repeatedly to set the number of
listening positions and press 9l.
Choices: 1 (default), 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
7 To select the parameters to be optimized,
press 9k / n to select the parameter and
then press 9ENTER to check or uncheck
the box.
When you do not need to select the parameters to be
optimized, skip to step 8.
y
If you do not select the parameters to be optimized, this
unit will optimize the parameters you selected last time.
All the parameters except “Angle” are selected by the
initial factory settings.
8 Press 9l to return to the previous menu
level and then press 9n to select “Start”.
9 Press 9ENTER to start the measurement.
This unit starts to count down from 10 seconds.
y
• To start the measurement immediately, press 9ENTER
again.
• To cancel the automatic setup and return to the previous
screen, press ?RETURN and then 9ENTER.
Loud test tones are output from each speaker during
the measurement. Once all items for the first listening
position are measured, the following message
appears.
If an error or warning message appears, see “Error and
warning messages” (page 37).
10 Move the optimizer microphone to the
second listening position and then press
9ENTER to start the measurement.
y
To skip the measurements at the remaining listening
positions, press 9n.
11 Repeat step 10 until the measurement at all
listening positions are made.
If you have selected “Angle” in step 7, follow steps 7
to 13 in “Basic automatic setup” (page 35).
If you have not selected “Angle” in step 7,
“Measurement Completed Successful” appears once
all items are measured. Follow steps 11 to 13 in
“Basic automatic setup” (page 35).
Before proceeding next operation
Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the
automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. During the
automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on
this unit. For more accurate measurements, we recommended
that you get out of the room or move to the wall where
speakers are not around during the measurement.
Information
Setup Menu
Start
Multi Measure 7
Wiring
Distance
[ ]
Pre Check
Main Check
Wiring
Distance
Put the microphone at
2nd listening position
Next:ENTER
Skip:
Note
39 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
PREPARATION
Use this feature to review the result of the automatic setup.
You can also reload the automatic setup parameters in case
you are not satisfied with the speaker setup and sound
adjustments you have configured manually.
If you reload the automatic setup parameters, the settings you
have configured manually are cleared. To save the settings
before reloading the automatic setup parameters, see “System
Memory” (page 91).
1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP
and then press IMENU.
The GUI menu appears in the video monitor.
y
If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 67) is
displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI
menu.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Setup”
and then press 9h.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Auto
Setup” and then press 9h.
4 Press 9k to select “Information” and then
press 9h.
5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter of which you want to check the
setting.
Reviewing and reloading the
automatic setup parameters
Note
Parameter Descriptions
Multi Measure
(Multiple point
measurement)
Displays the number of listening position
actually measured.
Wiring
(Speaker wiring)
Displays the polarity of each connected
speaker.
– “NRM” appears when the polarity of the
connected speaker is normal.
– “REV” appears when the polarity of the
connected speaker is reversed.
– “DET” appears when this unit detects the
subwoofer is connected.
– “–––” appears when no speaker is
connected to the corresponding speaker
channel.
Distance
(Speaker
distance)
Displays the speaker distance from the
listening position. Press 9h repeatedly to
switch the unit to display the value of the
each speaker distance.
Size
(Speaker size)
Displays the size of the connected speakers
and the bass cross over frequency (“Cross”).
– “LRG” appears when the connected
speaker has the ability to reproduce the
low-frequency signals effectively.
– “SML” appears when the connected
speaker does not have the ability to
reproduce the low-frequency signals
effectively.
Equalizing
(Speaker
equalizing)
Displays the result of the adjustment of the
frequency responses of each connected
speaker. You can switch the parametric
equalizer type that appears in the result
display by pressing 9h repeatedly in the
“Equalizing” result display. To apply the
result that is displayed in the display, press
9ENTER.
Choices: Natural, Flat, Front
– Select “Natural” to average out the
frequency response of all speakers with
higher frequencies being less
emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”
setting sounds a little harsh.
– Select “Flat” to average the frequency
response of all speakers. Recommended
if all of your speakers are of similar
quality.
– Select “Front” to adjust the frequency
response of each speaker in accordance
with the sound of your front speakers.
Recommended if your front speakers are
of much higher quality than your other
speakers.
Level
(Speaker level)
Displays the result of the adjustment of each
connected speaker output level. You can
display the result of the adjustment of the
speaker level for each parametric equalizer
type (see above) by pressing 9h
repeatedly. Select “Through” to display the
result when this unit does not use the
parametric equalizer.
Angle
(Speaker angle)
Displays the angles of the front speakers,
surround speakers, and front presence
speakers.
40 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
y
The results of the measurement that are the causes of the
warning message(s) appear in yellow or pink.
• “–––” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel or this unit does not measure the
corresponding speaker channel yet.
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, run the automatic setup again to
recalibrate your system.
• The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be longer
than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your
subwoofer or external amplifiers if you connect them.
• In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for the
same band to provide finer adjustments.
6 To reload the displayed parameter, press
9ENTER.
7 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.
y
• You can also set the parametric equalizer type with “PEQ
Select” (page 79).
• You can set the phase of the connected subwoofer with “Phase”
(page 76).
Notes
41 En
BASIC
OPERATION
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
y
• If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT
jacks of this unit, press RHDMI OUT repeatedly to select
the active video monitor(s). See page 42 for details.
• You can operate this unit by using the graphical user
interface (GUI) screen (page 64).
• You can configure the display settings with “Video”
(page 81) and “Display Set” (page 88).
2 Rotate the
I
INPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (3))
The name of the selected input source appears for a
few seconds.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the instruction manuals for the source
component.
• Bluetooth component playback (page 55)
• iPod playback (page 57)
• Playback via USB or network (page 59)
4
Rotate
M
VOLUME
(or press
J
VOLUME +/–
)
to adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
y
To adjust the level of each speaker, see page 54.
5 Rotate the
J
PROGRAM selector (or press
one of the sound field program selector
buttons (Q) repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
For details about sound field program, see page 45.
y
To switch the information (current input source, current
sound field program, etc) displayed in the front panel
display, press GINFO (or set the operation mode selector
to FAMP and then press CINFO) repeatedly.
Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, set “Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS”
before the playback (page 73).
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to
F
AMP.
Basic procedure
DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
DVD
USB
NET
Selected input source
Available input sources
Movie
Sci-Fi
Selected sound field program
Selected sound field program category
42 En
Playback
Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the
input jack assigned to an input source when more than one
jacks are assigned to an input source.
1 Rotate the
I
INPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (3)) to select
the desired input source.
2
Press
C
AUDIO SELECT
and then rotate
J
PROGRAM
selector (or set the operation
mode to
FAMP
and then press
OAUDIO
SEL
repeatedly) to select the desired audio
input jack select setting.
y
You can configure the default audio input jack select setting
with “Audio Select” (page 73).
This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned
to the selected input source in “I/O Assignment” (page 87).
“HDMI” is available only when an HDMI input jack is
assigned.
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (page 27) as the input source.
Rotate the
I
INPUT selector on the front panel
to select “MULTI CH” (or press
3
MULTI).
y
You can configure the multi channel input settings with
“MULTI CH” (page 73).
Sound field programs cannot be selected when “MULTI CH” is
selected as the input source.
Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack(s) to output
the input signals.
Set the operation mode selector to
F
AMP and
then press RHDMI OUT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired setting.
The HDMI output setting changes as follows.
y
You can select the HDMI OUT jack at which HDMI control
signals are output with “Control Monitor” (page 84).
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI
signals are not input, no sound is output.
COAX/OPT
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is output.
ANALOG
Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
Note
DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER
A.SEL: AUTO
USB
NET
Selected audio input jack
select setting
Available input sources
Selecting the multi-channel input
component
Note
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack
OUT 1+2
Outputs the signals at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks simultaneously.
OUT 1
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
OUT 2
Outputs the signals at the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
OFF
Does not output any signals at the HDMI OUT
1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. Select this setting
when you do not use the video monitor
connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.
OUT1+2 OUT1
OUT2OFF
43 En
Playback
BASIC
OPERATION
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA
mode activates automatically (page 50).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• All digital multi-channel audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, only the
signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are
output.
Press
L
MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press
L
MUTE again to resume
the audio output.
y
• The VOLUME level indicator flashes while the mute function is
on.
• You can configure the muting level with “Muting Type”
(page 78).
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP
and then press 8STATUS on the remote
control.
The input source information screen appears in the
GUI screen.
2 Press 9l / h to toggle between the audio
and video information.
3 Press 8STATUS on the remote control
again to exit from the input source
information screen.
■ Audio information
• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
• Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include
the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are
encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz.
• Even if you make settings to output bitstreams directly, some
players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus
bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the
DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.
Using your headphones
Notes
Muting the audio output
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
LEVEL
MULTI ZONE
MIC
OPTIMIZER
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT
PROGRAM
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MENU ENTER
NEXT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
1
ZONE 2
2
SYSTEM MEMORY
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
3
ZONE 4
4
INFO
ZONE CONTROLS
TONE
CONTROL
Displaying the input source
information
Format Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to
analog input.
Sampling The number of samples per second taken from
a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
Channel The number of source channels in the input
signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a
multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
Bitrate The number of bits passing a given point per
second.
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level preset to the
current input bitstream signal.
Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically
switch decoders.
Notes
44 En
Playback
■ Video information
HDMI error message
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (page 29).
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and
then press CSLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
The sleep timer setting changes as shown below.
Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up
in the front panel display, and the display returns to the
selected sound field program.
To cancel the sleep timer
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and then press
CSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to select
“SLEEP OFF”.
y
If you set the main zone to the standby mode, the sleep timer is
automatically canceled.
HDMI signal Type of the source video signals and
the video signals output at the HDMI
OUT jacks of this unit.
HDMI Resolution Resolution of the input signal (analog
or HDMI) and the output signal
(HDMI).
Analog Resolution Resolution of the source video signals
and the analog video signals output at
the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT
jacks of this unit.
HDMI Error Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices.
Device Over The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
HDCP Error
(HDMI Message)
HDCP authentication failed.
Out Of Resolution Out of resolution. The connected
monitor is not compatible with the
resolution of the input video signal.
Using the sleep timer
120min. 90min.
60min.30min.OFF
45 En
BASIC
OPERATION
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing
(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD and
DTS-HD Master Audio sources.
Rotate the
J
PROGRAM selector (or set the
operation mode selector to FAMP and then
press one of the sound field selector buttons (Q)
repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the short message display.
y
• You can select the desired sound field program and setting the
parameters by using the GUI menu (page 68).
• Available sound field parameters and the created sound field
differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this
unit.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (page 42) or when this unit is in the PURE
DIRECT mode (page 53).
• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field
program, this unit applies the selected program without
activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to
48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.
Sound field programs
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
46 En
Sound field programs
■ For audio music sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the PURE DIRECT mode (page 53), STRAIGHT mode (page 51), or surround
decode mode (page 52).
CLASSICAL
Descriptions of the characteristics of the sound field programs
Following indexes indicates the characteristics and trends of each sound field program.
Size of sound field space (Size)
Indicates the size of the sound field to be generated. If the
value for this item is small, the sound is that of a small
space, while if the value is large, the sound is that of a vast
space.
Vertical/horizontal balance (V/H balance)
Indicates the balance of the vertical (height) and horizontal
directions for the sound field to be generated. If this item is
more in the horizontal direction, the sound is that of a
space with strong reflections from the walls, while if it is
more in the vertical direction, the sound is that of a space
with strong reflections from the ceiling.
Front/rear balance (F/R balance)
A CINEMA DSP sound field processing expressing
whether the effect is stronger towards the front or rear.
When the effect is stronger towards the front, the listener
senses a feeling of openness and depth towards the screen,
while when the effect is stronger towards the rear, the
listener gets a sense of envelopment and movement. Suits
basically all types of contents for programs with a good
front/rear balance, and is effective when selected
appropriately for programs in which the balance is more
towards either the front or rear.
Sound field atmosphere (Atmosphere)
The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to
whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following;
Simple: Sounds that fade straight-forwardly, with a light,
gentle impression, depending on the program. This suits
almost all contents relatively well, but provides little
brilliance or powerfulness.
Complex: Sounds transform in complex ways as they fade
out, with a rich, brilliant impression, depending on the
program.
This is extremely effective for the right contents, but is
suited for a smaller range of contents.
The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to
whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following;
Calm: An overall composed, moderate effect, stressing the
overall quality of the atmosphere without aiming at any
extreme effects. This suits almost all contents relatively
well, but provides little showiness or powerfulness.
Powerful: Designed with specific contents in mind
(expressing vast spaces, feverish excitement, etc.). This is
extremely effective for the right contents, but is suited for a
smaller range of contents.
Hall in Munich
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500
seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as
normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The
listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall
with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and
ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all
around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
The characteristics of the sound field programs may differ depending on the settings of the listening room, etc.
Note
Small Large
Vertical Horizontal
Front Rear
Simple Complex
Calm Powerful
CLASSICAL
1
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
47 En
Sound field programs
BASIC
OPERATION
LIVE/CLUB
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle
stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels
freely.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church
has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow
shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time
and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation
rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the
church.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling
like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations
that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with
the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the
stage located in the corner.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off
the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound
as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles,
with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the
center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was
a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people
to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant
sound.
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
LIVE/CLUB
2
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
Size
V/H balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Simple
Large
Horizontal
Complex
48 En
Sound field programs
■ For various sources
ENTERTAIN
■ For game programs
ENTERTAIN
■ For visual sources of music
ENTERTAIN
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts
and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports
broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are
positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the
stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a
feeling of presence in the stadium.
Action Game
This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and
FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range
per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with
a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while
maintaining a clear sense of directions.
Roleplaying Game
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games.
It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field
design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and spatial
feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround
effects in the movie scenes in the game.
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live
performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge
oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that
emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of
rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum
level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices.
“Recital/Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in
front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround
sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall
effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The
listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera
entertainment.
ENTERTAIN
3
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
ENTERTAIN
3
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
ENTERTAIN
3
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
49 En
Sound field programs
BASIC
OPERATION
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder (page 52) used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”).
MOVIE
Standard
This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding
feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of
multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been
designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which
the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the
left, right and rear.
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale
movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field
matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an
excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound
design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring
movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog,
sound effects and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design
of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains
reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also
restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio
channels and the clarity of the sound.
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide
range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and
comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum
spatial feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music
softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a
way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of
viewing.
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources
such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie
theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and
reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space
with a certain sound depth.
MOVIE
4
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
Size
V/H balance
F/R balance
Atmosphere
Small
Vertical
Front
Calm
Large
Horizontal
Rear
Powerful
50 En
Sound field programs
■ Stereo playback
STEREO
■ For compression artifacts
(Compressed Music Enhancer mode)
ENHANCER
■ Surround decoder mode
SUR. DECODE
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. It
creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound
field.
When you set “Surround” to “None” (page 75), Virtual
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you
select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (page 45).
Virtual CINEMA DSP does not activate in the following cases:
– “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source (page 42).
– headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– the unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode (page 50).
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound through ordinary headphones.
SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you
connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening
to CINEMA DSP sound field programs (page 45). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
SILENT CINEMA does not activate in the following cases:
– “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source (page 42).
– The unit is in the “2ch Stereo” (page 50), “STRAIGHT”
(page 51) or “PURE DIRECT” (page 53) mode.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2
channels.
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you
play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the
source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all
speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal
for background music at parties, etc.
Straight Enhancer
Use this program to improve the sound enhancer nearest to the
original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel
compression artifacts.
7ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-
channel stereo.
Surround Decoder
Use this program to play back sources with using the desired
surround decoders (page 52).
STEREO
5
ENHANCER
6
SUR. DECOD
E
7
Note
Note
51 En
Sound field programs
BASIC
OPERATION
CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and
accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.
You can activate and deactivate the CINEMA DSP 3D
mode.
Press
P
3D DSP repeatedly to turn on or off the
CINEMA DSP 3D mode.
While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the 3D
indicator lights up.
CINEMA DSP 3D does not activate (“3D:--” appears) in the
following cases:
– the “Front Presence” setting is set to “None” (page 76).
– no CINEMA DSP is selected.
– headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
When this unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Press
K
STRAIGHT (or
T
STRAIGHT) to select
“STRAIGHT”.
The names of the audio signal format of the input source
and the active decoder appear in the front panel display.
To deactivate the STRAIGHT mode
Press KSTRAIGHT (or TSTRAIGHT) again or select
another sound field program (page 45).
Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to
F
AMP.
Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode
Note
3
MOVIE
Sci-Fi
Lights up
Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to
F
AMP.
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
52 En
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-
channels.
Set the operation mode selector to
F
AMP and
then press
S
SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the
remote control to select the surround decode
mode.
You can select desired surround decoder modes depending
on the type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
y
You can change the decoder parameter settings in “Stereo/
Surround” (page 68).
■ Decoder descriptions
y
When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-
channel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the
corresponding decoder for each source.
■ Selecting decoders used with MOVIE
sound field programs
You can select one of the following decoder types for use
with the MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono
Movie”). For details about the MOVIE sound field
programs, see “For movie sources” (page 49). For details
on how to select the decoder type, see “Sound field
parameter descriptions” (page 69).
Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema
Using audio features
Selecting decoders
Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when
“Surround Back” (page 76) is set to “None” or using headphones.
PLIIx Music
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when
“Surround Back” (page 76) is set to “None” or using headphones.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” (page 76) is set to “None” or using headphones.
Decoder description
Name of the
decoder
(Decoder Type)
PLIIx Music
PLII Music
PLIIx Game
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when
“Surround Back” (page 76) is set to “None” or using headphones.
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
53 En
Using audio features
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel
sources
If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX
or DTS-ES decoders.
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP and
then press MEXTD SUR. on the remote control
repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-
channel playback.
y
Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when
this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input
sources correctly.
• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the
speakers and the input sources.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:
– when “Surround” (page 75) or “Surround Back” (page 76) is
set to “None”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when this unit is in the stereo playback, 7ch Enhancer
(page 50) or PURE DIRECT (page 53) mode.
– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (page 114).
• If “EXTD Surround” is set to “Auto” (page 89), the decoder
mode is automatically set to “AUTO” every time this unit is
turned off.
Use the PURE DIRECT mode to enjoy the pure fidelity
sound of the selected source. When the PURE DIRECT
mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source
with the least circuitry.
Press HPURE DIRECT (or
N
PURE DIRECT)
to turn on or off the PURE DIRECT mode.
The
H
PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up
and the front panel display automatically turns off while
this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode.
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the PURE DIRECT mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the GUI menu
• The PURE DIRECT mode is automatically canceled whenever
this unit is turned off.
y
To make this unit output video signals during the PURE
DIRECT mode, configure the “Pure Direct” setting (page 81).
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front L/R and center speaker channels and the
subwoofer channel.
1 Press
C
TONE CONTROL on the front
panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency
response (BASS).
2 Rotate the
J
PROGRAM selector to adjust
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
the low-frequency response (BASS).
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and
center speakers and the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the PURE DIRECT
mode is activated, or when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input
source.
Choice Functions
AUTO
Activates the optimum decoder to play back
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit
recognizes a signal flag being input.
Decoders
(PLIIx Movie,
PLIIx Music,
EX/ES)
Use this feature to activate the desired decoders
for the playback of multi-channel sources
manually.
OFF
Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1
channels.
Notes
Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to
F
AMP.
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Notes
Adjusting the tonal quality
Notes
54 En
Using audio features
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in the
automatic setup (page 34) and “Level” (page 77).
1 Press
C
LEVEL and then 9k / n repeatedly
to select the speaker you want to adjust.
y
The available speaker channels differ depending on the speaker settings.
2 Press 9l / h on the remote control to
adjust the speaker output level.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Use this feature to select a source component from which
you want to record.
1 Press and hold
C
REC OUT until “REC
OUT” appears in the front panel display.
2 Rotate
J
PROGRAM to select the source
component.
y
To record the input source currently selected, select “SOURCE”.
When zone 4 is turned on, no signal is output at the DVR
OUT, VCR OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks.
Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to
F
AMP.
Adjusting the speaker level
Note
Display Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SUR.L
Surround left speaker
SUR.R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back left speaker
SB R
Surround back right speaker
FP L
Presence left speaker
FP R
Presence right speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
Selecting the recording source
Note
55 En
BASIC
OPERATION
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and
enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between
this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
and your Bluetooth component in advance.
For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “Bluetooth” (page 123).
This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Bluetooth profile.
Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth
component with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this
unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been
deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a
Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.
y
• You need the pairing operation only for the first time when you
use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver.
• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other
component with which Bluetooth communications are to be
established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s
operating instructions.
There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “Pairing”
in the GUI menu and quick pairing.
■ Pairing by using the GUI menu
Use this feature to perform pairing with the GUI screen.
For details, see “Pairing” (page 74).
■ Quick pairing
1 Rotate the IINPUT selector (or set the
operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as
the input source.
2 Turn on your Bluetooth component and then
set the Bluetooth component to the pairing
mode.
For details about how to operate the Bluetooth
component, refer to the manual for it.
3 Press and hold DENTER (or 9ENTER)
until “Searching” appears in the front panel
display.
While the Bluetooth receiver is in the pairing mode,
DOCK indicator flashes in the front panel display.
y
To cancel the pairing, press
DENTER
(or
9ENTER
) again.
4 Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth receiver.
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in
the Bluetooth device list.
5 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the
Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass
key “0000” on the Bluetooth component.
When the pairing procedure is successful,
“Completed” appears in the front panel display.
The Yamaha Bluetooth receiver can be paired with up to eight
Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully
with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the
pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared.
1 Rotate the IINPUT selector (or set the
operation mode selector to FSOURCE and
then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as
the input source.
2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component.
When the connected Bluetooth receiver detects the
Bluetooth component, “BT Connected” appears in
the front panel display.
y
• When you press 9ENTER on the remote control, the
connected Bluetooth receiver searches and connect to the last
connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth receiver
cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in
the front panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth receiver from the Bluetooth
component, press 9ENTER.
Using Bluetooth™ components
Note
Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver
and your Bluetooth component
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the
pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully
understand all the instructions before starting.
Note
Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
56 En
In “Music Content” menu of the GUI menu, you can browse the music contents of iPod, USB component, PC/
MusicCAST and Internet radio. You can also use the playback control feature or configure the playback style setting for
the selected sub input source.
1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP
on the remote control and then press
IMENU to display the GUI menu.
y
If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 67) is
displayed, press and hold
I
MENU
to display the top GUI
menu.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Music
Content” and then press 9h.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
sub input source and then press 9ENTER.
The menu of the selected sub input source appears in
the GUI screen. The following screen shows the iPod
menu for example.
If the selected sub input source is not available, “Not Available”
appears.
4 Navigate the menu of the selected sub input
source.
For details about the menu items and operation
procedure for each sub input source, see the
following pages.
• iPod (page 57)
•USB (page59)
• PC/MCX (page 59)
• NET RADIO (page 59)
5 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.
Music Content menu
Music Content menu operations
Note
iPod
USB
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
Select:ENTER
1 / 4
Music
Videos
Settings
"Simple Remote Mode"
57 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit (page 27), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can
also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression artifacts
(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 50).
• This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel, including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model of your Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following description is
based on using YDS-11.
y
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod Connected” appears in the front panel display.
• For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “iPod” (page 123).
• You can select whether or not this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is in the standby mode by configuring
the “Standby Charge” setting (page 89).
The following diagram shows the construction of the iPod menu. For information on how to display the iPod menu, see
“Music Content menu operations” (page 56).
*
“Videos” does not appear unless your iPod and Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature.
Also, the folder structure under “Videos” varies depending on the video contents stored on your iPod.
Using iPod™
Notes
iPod menu tree
Note
Music
Videos *
Settings
“Simple Remote
Mode”
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Repeat
Shuffle
playlists
artist list
album list
song list
genre list
composer list
song list
album list
song list
artist list
album list
song list
album list
song list
song list
iPod
58 En
Using iPod™
You can control your iPod with the following remote
control buttons.
■ GUI menu operation
To navigate the iPod menu using the GUI screen, set the
operation mode selector to FAMP.
You can control your iPod by using the zone OSD. However, the
design and available functions may be different from the iPod
menu displayed in the GUI screen in the main zone.
■ Playback control operation
To operate your iPod using the following remote control
buttons, set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE
and then press 3DOCK.
■ Playback style settings
To change the following playback style settings, select
“Settings” in the iPod menu.
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.
y
• To toggle between setting parameters, press 9ENTER
repeatedly.
• When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All”, “ ” or “ ” appears
in the GUI screen.
• When “Shuffle” is on, “ ” appears in the GUI screen.
■ Simple Remote Mode
If you select “Simple Remote Mode” in the iPod menu,
this unit turns off the GUI screen and allows you to
operate your iPod with the remote control of this unit or
controls on your iPod.
y
You can also select the Simple Remote Mode by holding down
KDISPLAY for 3 seconds when the operation mode selector is
set to FAMP.
■ Play information screen
[1] Album art (if available)
[2] Track number/total tracks
[3] Elapsed time
[4] (playback), (pausing), (search
forward) or (search backward)
[5] Shuffle and repeat icons
[6] Artist name, album title, song title
[7] Progress bar
[8] Remaining time
[9] Submenu icon
Submenu items
Play Control (Playback control)
Select the desired playback control item and then press (or
press and hold) 9ENTER to control your iPod.
Play Style (Playback style)
Select the desired playback style setting and then press
9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between setting
parameters. For details on the playback style settings, see
“Playback style settings” (page 58).
Controlling iPod™
Button Function
9 ENTER Subsequent menu/Play
k Menu up
n Menu down
l Previous menu
h Subsequent menu
0 SUBMENU Turns on/off the submenu when the play
information screen is displayed
I MENU Turns on/off the GUI menu when the play
information screen is not displayed
K DISPLAY Turns on/off the play information screen
Note
Button Function
A ll Search backward (Press and hold)
hh Search forward (Press and hold)
a Skip forward
b Skip backward
s Stop
e Pause
p Play
Frankie Zipper
Made-to-order
Road to India
1/12
0:51 -7:44
Play Information SUBMENU
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
59 En
BASIC
OPERATION
This unit is equipped with USB and network features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3, MPEG-4
AAC, and WMA files saved on your USB storage device, USB portable audio player, PC and Yamaha MCX-2000 or
access the Internet Radio.
• Yama ha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical
reference books, if needed.
• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
y
For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the GUI screen, see “USB and Network” (page 121).
The following diagram shows the construction of the USB, PC/MCX and NET RADIO menus. For information on how
to display these menus, see “Music Content menu operations” (page 56).
*1
The directory hierarchy of the USB menu varies depending on the folder structure of the connected USB component.
*2
Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
*3
The folder structure under the location list varies depending on your region.
Using USB and network features
Notes
USB and network menu tree
Notes
USB
*1
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
folder list
file list
PC server list
*2
MusicCAST
*2
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular stations
Podcasts
Help
station list
location list
*3
genre list
station list
station list
Podcast list
help item list
station list
Podcast list
60 En
Using USB and network features
You can navigate the USB and network menus with the
following remote control buttons.
■ GUI menu operation
To navigate the USB and network menus using the GUI
screen, set the operation mode selector to FAMP.
You can navigate the USB and network menus by using the
zone OSD. However, the design and available functions may be
different from the menus displayed in the GUI screen in the
main zone.
■ Playback control operation
To operate your USB or network component using the
following remote control buttons, set the operation mode
selector to FSOURCE and then press 3USB/NET.
Some button operations do not work depending on the selected
sub input source.
■ Play information screen
The following screen shows the play information screen
displayed for USB content playback for example.
Available information and functions vary depending on
the selected sub input source.
[1] Artist name, album title, song title
[2] Elapsed time
[3] (playback)
[4] Shuffle and repeat icons
[5] Submenu icon
Submenu items
Play Control (Playback control)
Select the desired playback control item and then press (or
press and hold) 9ENTER to control the playback.
Play Style (Playback style)
Select the desired playback style setting and then press
9ENTER repeatedly to toggle between setting
parameters. For details on the playback style settings, see
“Playback style settings” (page 58).
y
To turn on the shuffle feature, set “Shuffle” to “On”.
Navigating USB and network
menus
Button Function
9 ENTER Subsequent menu/Play
k Menu up
n Menu down
l Previous menu
h Subsequent menu
0 SUBMENU Turns on/off the submenu when any submenu
items are available (submenu icon appears on
the bottom right corner of the GUI menu
screen)
I MENU Turns on/off the GUI menu when the play
information screen is not displayed
K DISPLAY Turns on/off the play information screen
Note
Button Function
A a Skip forward (except “NET RADIO”)
b Skip backward (except “NET RADIO”)
s Stop
p Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
Note
Frankie Zipper
Made-to-order
Road to India
0:51
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Play Information SUBMENU
61 En
Using USB and network features
BASIC
OPERATION
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3,
WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files saved on your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player connected to the
USB ports of this unit.
This unit is equipped with the front and rear USB ports.
Set “USB Select” to “Front” or “Rear” to select the active
USB port (page 75).
• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or
FAT 32 format) or USB MTP devices.
• Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You
cannot select files in other partitions.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per
directory are recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the
requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3, WMA and MPEG-4 AAC files may not be
playable or may be noisy when played.
• When you connect your USB storage device or USB portable
audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.
Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or
Yamaha MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that
enhances the concept of Yamaha exclusive MusicCAST, a
digital music delivery method over a personal network.
1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC,
or register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-
2000.
• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Player 11 on
your PC” and “Registering this unit on the Yamaha
MCX-2000” (page 61).
• This procedure is needed only for the first time.
• (PC only) You may need to make some settings of
Windows Media Player 11 to start the contents
sharing. Refer to the attached documents of
Windows Media Player 11.
2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.
3 Select “PC/MCX” in the “Music Content”
menu and then select the desired server or
“MusicCAST” to begin playback.
• Yama ha MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• You can connect this unit to up to 15 PC servers and 1 MCX-
2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as
this unit.
• Some WAV, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WMA files on your PC
may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not
been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files
immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting
of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000.
■ Installing Windows Media Player 11 on
your PC
With Windows Media Player 11, you can play back the
audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents
of Windows Media Player 11.
y
You can also play back the audio files on your PC with
Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed.
1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media
Player 11 from the Microsoft website, or use the
upgrade function of the installed Microsoft Windows
Media Player.
2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on
the PC.
The shared folder is added to the PC server list in the
top “PC/MCX” menu screen.
• If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista,
Windows Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some
products).
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus
software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this
unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software
appropriately.
■ Registering this unit on the Yamaha
MCX-2000
You must register this unit on your Yamaha MCX-2000 so
that this unit can be recognized by your Yamaha MCX-
2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied
with your Yamaha MCX-2000.
1 Turn off this unit.
2 Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto
Config” mode.
3 Turn on this unit.
• “MusicCAST” appears in the top “PC/MCX”
menu screen.
• if the client ID for this unit appears in the OSD of
your Yamaha MCX-2000 (shown as “CL-
XXXXX”), the automatic configuration is
complete.
Using a USB storage device or a
USB portable audio player
Notes
Using a PC server or Yamaha
MCX-2000
Notes
Notes
62 En
Using USB and network features
• The latter part of the client ID for this unit is same as the last 5
digits of the MAC address of this unit.
• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual
Config” mode of your Yamaha MCX-2000 (refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then select “NETWORK”
in “ADVANCED SETUP” on this unit (page 114).
• The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other
than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client
title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will
stop the playback on this unit.
Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This
unit uses the vTuner Internet Radio station database
service particularly customized for this unit, providing
over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store
your favorite stations with bookmarks.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played.
• To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network
(page 28).
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will
not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,
etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.
y
• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a
number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The
Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops
playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access
of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure
the security settings appropriately.
■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio
stations with bookmarks
Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio
stations quickly.
Set the operation mode to FSOURCE and then
press and hold
8
TITLE while the selected
Internet Radio station service is being broadcast.
The stored Internet Radio station is added to the
“Bookmarks” list (page 59).
y
• To remove the stored station from the list, select the station
under “Bookmarks” and then press and hold 8TITLE.
• You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations to this
unit by accessing the following website with the web browser
on your PC. To use this feature, you need the MAC address of
this unit as the ID number and your e-mail address to create
your personal account. Use “Information” in the “Network”
menu to display the MAC address of this unit (page 85). For
details, refer to the help information on the website.
URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/
Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV,
MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or
USB storage devices and Internet Radio Stations directly.
You can preset 8 items for each sub input source.
■ Assigning the items to the numeric
button (1-8) (B)
1 Select a desired content you want to assign
to a numeric button (1-8) (B), and then play
back the content.
2 Press
0
MEMORY.
The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel
and this unit automatically selects an empty preset
number.
y
• To store the selected content under an empty preset number
automatically, press and hold 0MEMORY for more than 2
seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the following steps are
unnecessary.
• To cancel the preset, press 0MEMORY again.
• When you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the memory preset mode is automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from step 2.
3 Press a numeric button (1-8) (B) that you
want to assign.
y
If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next to
the preset number), the current preset number will be
overwritten.
4 Press DENTER (or 9ENTER).
The preset content is set and the PRESET indicator
disappears.
Notes
Using the Internet Radio
Notes
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to FSOURCE and then
press 3USB/NET.
Using shortcut buttons
MEMORY
PRESET
Memory 1
USB
Lights up
MEMORY
PRESET
Memory 7
USB
Preset number
63 En
Using USB and network features
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Select an item by using numeric buttons
(1-8) (B)
Press one of the numeric button (1-8) (B) to
which the desired item is assigned to select the
item as the input source.
This unit starts the playback of the source assigned to
the selected numeric button.
• “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and
the short message display when you press the numeric
button (1-8) (B) to which no items are assigned.
• This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the
selected numeric button (1-8) (B) in the following cases:
– the connected USB device is incorrect.
– the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is
turned off or disconnected from the network.
– the selected Internet Radio station is temporary
unavailable or out of service.
– the directory of the selected item has been changed.
y
This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a
directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct item
by using numeric buttons (1-8) (B) if you add or delete
music files to or from the same directory or playlist as the
preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to the
numeric buttons (1-8) (B) again.
We recommend the following methods:
USB storage devices
Create eight directories which contain the desired items in a
directory beside the directory which contains all music files,
and then preset the top item of each directory to the numeric
buttons (1-8) (B). When you change the items which are
preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B), replace the items in
the directory to the desired items without deleting the
directory.
PC server/MCX-2000
Create eight playlists which contain the desired items, and
then preset the top item of each playlist to the numeric
buttons (1-8) (B). When you change the items which are
preset to the numeric buttons (1-8) (B), replace the
registered items in the playlist with the desired items
without deleting the playlist.
Notes
64 En
■ GUI menu tree
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Stereo/Surround
(page 68)
Input Select
(page 73)
Music Content
(page 75)
Setup
TUNER
MULTI CH
PHONO
CD
TV
MD/CD-R
BD/HD DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
VIDEO AUX
DOCK*
USB
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
iPod
USB
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
Front
Center
Surround
Surround Back
Front Presence
Subwoofer
Speaker
Headphone
Speaker
Headphone
Control
Bass
Treble
Auto Bypass
Mode
Auto
Manual
Configuration
Distance
Level
Test Tone
Adaptive DRC
Adaptive DSP Level
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Muting Type
LFE Level
Dynamic Range
Parametric EQ
Tone Control
Lipsync
HDMI Audio
Pure Direct
Channel Mute
Auto Setup
(page 34)
Speaker
(page 75)
Vo l u m e
(page 77)
Sound (page 78)
Phase
Bass Out
65 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Video (page 81)
HDMI (page 83)
System Memory
(page 91)
Network
(page 84)
Multi Zone
(page 85)
Option
(page 87)
Analog ` Analog
Analog ` HDMI
HDMI ` HDMI
Processing
Standby Through
Audio Output
Control Monitor
Monitor Info.
Main
Zone2
Zone3
Zone4
Configuration
Network Standby
Information
Zone SP Assign
Component Assign
Party Mode Set
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Zone OSD
Zone Rename
Memory Guard
I/O Assignment
Input Rename
Display Set
iPod
Initial Set
Trigger Output
Resolution
Aspect
Prog. Re-Processing
Adjustment
Mode
Input
Output
HDMI OUT1
HDMI OUT2
Main Load
Main Save
Main Rename
Zone2 Load
Zone2 Save
Zone2 Rename
Zone3 Load
Zone3 Save
Zone3 Rename
Zone4 Load
Zone4 Save
Zone4 Rename
Target: Zone2
Target: Zone3
Target: Zone4
Zone2 Volume
Zone2 Max Vol.
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Zone2 Balance
Zone2 Tone Control
Zone2 Mono
Zone2 Muting Type
Zone3 Volume
Zone3 Max Vol.
Zone3 Initial Vol.
Zone3 Balance
Zone3 Tone Control
Zone3 Mono
Zone3 Muting Type
Main
Zone2
Zone3
Zone4
Front Panel Display
Short Message
Playback Screen
Position
Wall Paper
Standby Charge
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
EXTD Surround
Trigger1
Trigger2
Dimmer
Scroll
Language
(page 90)
66 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
* “iPod” appears when an iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal. “Bluetooth” appears
when a Yamaha Bluetooth receiver is connected to the DOCK terminal.
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of
this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit.
y
• Refer to “GUI menu tree” (page 64) for the complete menu structure.
• Refer to “GUI menu operations” (page 67) for details about the basic operations in the GUI menu.
■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)
Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (page 68).
■ Input Select (Input select menu)
Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source (page 73).
■ Music Content (Music content menu)
Use this feature to browse the music contents of iPod, USB component, PC/MusicCAST and Internet radio (page 75).
■ Setup (Setup menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Auto Setup (Automatic setup menu)
Use this feature to run the automatic setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (page 34).
Speaker (Speaker menu)
See page 75 for details.
Volume (Volume menu)
See page 77 for details.
Sound (Sound menu)
See page 78 for details.
Video (Video menu)
See page 81 for details.
HDMI (HDMI menu)
See page 83 for details.
System Memory (System memory menu)
See page 91 for details.
Network (Network menu)
See page 84 for details.
Multi Zone (Multi-zone menu)
See page 85 for details.
Option (Option menu)
See page 87 for details.
■ Language (Display language menu)
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the front panel display or in the GUI menu of this
unit (page 90).
Note
GUI menu overview
Input Select
Music Content
Setup
Language
Stereo/Surround
Sound
Video
HDMI
System Memory
Network
67 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) menu that helps you to control the amplifier function of
this unit. With the GUI menu, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can
also set up this unit using the GUI menu.
■ Items in the GUI menu
■ Remote control operation
y
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP when you operate
the GUI menu using the remote control.
If you simply press IMENU, the menu directory displayed
before you turned off the GUI menu appears. To display the top
GUI menu (Top Menu), press and hold IMENU.
■ Front panel control operation
GUI menu operations
DVD
Top Menu -40.0dB
qPLIIx Movie Sci-Fi
Decoder
Sound field
program
Menu
area
Input
source
Menu
item
Menu directory Volume level
Input Select
Music Content
Setup
Language
Stereo/Surround
Sound
Video
HDMI
System Memory
Network
DVD
Input Select -40.0dB
qPLIIx Movie Sci-Fi
MD/CD-R
BD/HD DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
Input Select
[ENTER]
Submenu
icon
SUBMENU
Button Function
9k / n
Selects the item in the current menu level.
9h
Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.
9l
Returns to the previous menu level.
9ENTER
Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.
0SUBMENU
Turns on or off the submenu. (The submenu
icon appears when any submenu items exist
under the menu currently selected.)
IMENU
Turns on or off the GUI menu. Press and
hold IMENU to display the top GUI menu
(Top Menu).
Note
Control Function
CMENU
Turns on of off the GUI menu.
Ch
Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.
Cl
Returns to the previous menu level.
DENTER
Selects the currently selected menu item and
moves to the next menu level.
JPROGRAM
Selects the item in the current menu level.
68 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
y
To customize the program parameter settings, press
0SUBMENU to turn on the submenu after you select the
desired program.
■ Basic configuration of sound field
programs
Each sound field program has some parameters defining
the characteristics of the program. To customize the
selected sound field program, adjust “DSP Level” and/or
“Dialogue Lift” first, and then try other parameters.
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound
field programs (DSP Level)
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect
sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field
in the listening room. Use the “DSP Level” parameter to
adjust the level of the effect sounds.
Adjust “DSP Level” as follows:
Increase the value of “DSP Level” when
• the effect sound of the selected sound field
program is too weak.
• you cannot recognize any difference between the
sound field programs.
Decrease the value of “DSP Level” when
• the sound is vague.
• you feel that the additional sound effect is
excessive.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position
(Dialogue Lift)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is
at the center of the video monitor screen.
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video
monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the
highest position.
• “Dialogue Lift” is available when “Front Presence” is set to
“Yes” (page 76) and headphones are not connected.
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial
dialogue position.
Stereo/Surround
The DSP effect
sound level is low
The DSP effect sound
level is high
Notes
The ideal
dialogue
position
Move up to the ideal dialogue position
69 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
Sound field parameter Features
Decode Type
Decoder type. Select the decoder used with the selected sound field program. The decoder parameters for
“Surround Decoder” vary depending on the selected decoder type. See page 66 for details.
Init. Delay
Sur. Init.Delay
SB. Init. Delay
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the apparent size of the
sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The
smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the listener.
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding room
size parameters likewise.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay)
1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay)
Room Size
Sur. Room Size
SB. Room Size
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the sound field.
The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around
a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent
reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the
virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the corresponding initial
delay parameters likewise.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Time Time Time
Source sound
Early
reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound source
70 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Liveness
Sur. Liveness
SB. Liveness
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by
changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much
faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A
room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective
surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the
“liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Rev. Time
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay
by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.
Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get
articulate sound.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Sound field parameter Features
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0 Large value = 10
Reverberation
ReverberationSource sound
Rev. Time
Rev. Time Rev. Time
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early reflections
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
71 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Stereo program parameter descriptions
Rev. Delay
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning
of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later
reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Rev. Level
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the
reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Sound field parameter Features
Direct
(“2ch Stereo” only)
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound
when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: Auto, Off
y
• Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and
“TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS” (page 53).
• Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and
“TREBLE” are set to “BYPASS”.
• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and
right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the
following cases:
– “Bass Out” is set to “Front + SWFR” (page 76).
– “Front” is set to “Small” (page 75) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (page 76).
Center Level
Surround L Level
Surround R Level
Sur.Back L Level
Sur.Back R Level
F.PRNS L Level
F.PRNS R Level
(“7ch Stereo” only)
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels.
Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. The available parameters differ
depending on the speaker settings.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Sound field parameter Features
(dB)
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Time
60 dB
Source sound
Level
Rev. Level
Time
72 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
■ Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions
■ Decoder parameter descriptions
■ Initialize (Parameters initialization)
Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program.
Choices: No, Yes
• Select “Yes” and then press 9ENTER to set the program parameters to the factory default settings.
• Select “No” (or press 9l) to cancel the program parameter initialization.
y
Use “DSP PARAM” of “INITIALIZE” in “Advanced setup” to initialize the parameters of all sound field programs (page 114).
The Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
Features
Level
(“Straight Enhancer” and
“7ch Enhancer” only)
Straight enhancer or 7-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for the high-
frequency.
Choices: High, Low
Decoder parameter Features
Panorama
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well
as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: Off, On
Center Width
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
Dimension
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or
towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
Center Image
(“Neo:6 Music” only)
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel
to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to
1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)
Initial setting: 0.3
73 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input
source.
y
To customize the input source settings, press 0SUBMENU to
turn on the submenu after you select the input source.
■ Audio Select (Audio input jack selection)
Use this feature to select the type of the input jack you
want to use.
y
• You can also select the audio input jack by pressing CAUDIO
SELECT (or OAUDIO SEL) (page 42).
• You can set the default audio input jack select of this unit by
using “Audio Select” in “Initial Set” (page 89).
This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned
to the selected input source in “I/O Assignment” (page 87).
“HDMI” is available only when an HDMI input jack is
assigned.
■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)
Use this feature to switch the decoder mode.
“Decoder Mode” is available only when the digital audio input
jacks (HDMI, OPTICAL and/or COAXIAL) are assigned to the
selected input source.
■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each input source. This feature is useful if you want to
balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden
changes in volume when switching between input sources.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at the ZONE OUT
jacks.
Input Select
Input source Parameter
TUNER
iPod
PC/MCX
NET RADIO
Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
MULTI CH Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
Multi CH Assign
BGV
PHONO
CD
TV
MD/CD-R
BD/HD DVD
DVD
CBL/SAT
DVR
VCR
VIDEO AUX
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
Bluetooth Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
Pairing
Connect
USB Volume Trim
Video Adjustment
USB Select
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI
signals are not input, no sound is output.
Coax/Opt
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL
jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL
jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is
output.
Analog
Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
Note
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically detects digital audio signal
input types and selects the appropriate
decoder.
DTS
Activates the DTS decoder when digital
audio signals are input.
Note
74 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
■ Multi CH Assign
(Multi channel assignment)
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input
into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a
source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
Input Channels (Input channels)
Use this setting to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder (page 27).
Depending on the settings of the zone configuration, no sound
is output at the surround back speakers even if you set “Input
Channels” to “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and set the audio
output setting of the source component to 6 channels.
Front Input (Front channel input jacks)
If you selected “8ch” in “Input Channels”, you can select
analog jacks at which front left and right channel signals
from an external decoder will be input.
Choices: CD, TV, MD/CD-R, BD/HD DVD, DVD,
CBL/SAT, DVR, VCR, VIDEO AUX
If you have renamed an input source in “Input Rename”
(page 88), the name of the input source appears in the choices of
this parameter.
■ BGV (Back ground video)
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
If you have renamed an input source in “Input Rename”
(page 88), the name of the input source appears in the choices of
this parameter.
■ Video Adjustment (Video adjustment)
Use this feature to select the desired preset setting (video
quality adjustments) to be applied to the selected input
source.
Choices: Preset 1, Preset 2, Preset 3, Preset 4, Preset 5,
Preset 6
y
You can preset video quality parameters or edit video quality
parameters stored in a preset number with “Adjustment”
(page 82).
This feature is available only when “Analog ` HDMI” (page 82)
or “HDMI ` HDMI” (page 82) is set to “Processing”.
■ Pairing (Bluetooth pairing)
Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold
separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details
about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™
receiver and your Bluetooth component” (page 55).
1 Press 9ENTER to start pairing.
The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching
Bluetooth components.
2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth receiver.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
Bluetooth component.
3 Select the Bluetooth receiver in the
Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass
key “0000” on the Bluetooth component.
Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,
“Completed” appears.
4 Press 9l to return to the previous menu
level.
If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any
Bluetooth components, “Not found” appears.
■ Connect (Bluetooth connection)
Use this feature to establish a connection between the
Yamaha Bluetooth receiver (such as YBA-10, sold
separately) and your Bluetooth component.
Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component
with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this unit for the first
time of if the pairing data has been deleted.
Choice Description
6ch
Select “6ch” the connected component
outputs discrete 6-channel audio signals.
8ch
Select “8ch” the connected component
outputs discrete 8-channel audio signals.
Also set “Front Input” (see below) to the
analog audio jacks at which the front left
and right channel signals output from the
connected component are input.
Note
Note
Choice Functions
BD/HD DVD,
DVD, CBL/SAT,
DVR, VCR,
VIDEO AUX
Selects the corresponding input source as the
background video source.
Off
Does not play the video source in the
background.
Note
Note
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the
pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully
understand all the instructions before starting.
Note
Note
75 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Press 9ENTER to establish a connection.
The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching
Bluetooth components. Once the connection is established
successfully, “BT Connected” appears.
If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any Bluetooth
components, “Not found” appears.
y
To terminate the connection, press 9ENTER again.
■ USB Select (USB port select)
Selects the component connected to the front or rear USB
port as the input source (page 28).
Use this feature to browse the music contents of iPod,
USB component, PC/MusicCAST and Internet radio. See
the following pages for details.
• iPod (page 57)
•USB (page59)
• PC/MCX (page 59)
• NET RADIO (page 59)
Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker
settings. Most of the “Speaker” parameters are set
automatically when you run the automatic setup.
y
• Set “Test Tone” to “On” to output the test tone for the
“Configuration”, “Distance” and “Level” settings.
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the
crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or
slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
■ Configuration (Speaker configurations)
Front (Front speakers)
When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (page 76), you can select
only “Large” in “Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to other
than “Large” in advance, this unit change the value to “Large”
automatically.
Center (Center speaker)
Surround (Surround left/right speakers)
Note
Choice Functions
Front
Selects the component connected to the front
USB port as the input source.
Rear
Selects the component connected to the rear
USB port as the input source.
Music Content
Setup (Speaker)
Measure for the speaker size
The woofer section of a speaker is
– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large
– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small
Choice Descriptions
Large
Select this setting when the front speakers
are large.
Small
Select this setting when the front speakers
are small.
Note
Choice Descriptions
Large
Select this setting when the center speaker is
large.
Small
Select this setting when the center speaker is
small.
None
Select this setting when you do not use the
center speaker. The center channel signals
are directed to the front left and right
speakers.
Choice Descriptions
Large
Select this setting when the surround
speakers are large.
Small
Select this setting when the surround
speakers are small.
None
Select this setting when you do not use the
surround speakers. This unit is set to the
Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (page 50), and
“Surround Back” is automatically set to
“None”.
76 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Surround Back
(Surround back left/right speakers)
If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SUR.BACK SINGLE jack, and configure the “Surround
Back L” settings under “Distance” and “Level”.
Cross Over (Cross over)
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of the
speaker(s) that is set to “Small”. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the
speakers set to “Large” in “Configuration”.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Front Presence (Front presence speakers)
Use this feature if you want to use the front presence
speakers connected to this unit.
Subwoofer (Subwoofer)
Phase (Subwoofer phase)
Use this feature to switch the phase of your
subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Bass Out (Bass out)
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the
LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency
signals.
LFE signals output
Low-frequency signals output
■ Distance (Speaker distance)
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in most
home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be
applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will
arrive at the listening position at the same time.
Unit (Unit)
Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Distance”
parameter.
Choice Descriptions
Large x1
Select this setting when the single surround
back speaker is large.
Small x1
Select this setting when the single surround
back speaker is small.
Small x2
Select this setting when the surround back
left and right speakers are small.
Large x2
Select this setting when the surround back
left and right speakers are Large.
None
Select this setting when you do not use the
surround back speakers. The surround back
channel signals are directed to the surround
left and right speakers.
Note
Choice Descriptions
Yes
Select this setting when you use the front
presence speakers.
None
Select this setting when you do not use the
front presence speakers.
Choice Functions
Normal
Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.
Reverse
Sets the phase of the subwoofer to reverse.
Choice
Subwoofer and speakers
Subwoofers
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
Front +
SWFR
Output No output No output
SWFR
Output No output No output
Front
No output Output No output
Choice
Subwoofer and speakers
Subwoofers
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
Front +
SWFR
*1
*1 Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front
channels and other speakers set to “Small”.
*2
*2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front
channels.
*3
*3 Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set
to “Large”.
SWFR
*4
*4 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to
“Small”.
*3 *3
Front
No output *1 *3
Choice Functions
Meter (m)
Adjusts speaker distances in meters.
Feet (ft)
Adjusts speaker distances in feet.
77 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Control step: 0.05 m (0.2 ft)
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
■ Level (Speaker level)
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “Configuration” (page 75).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
y
If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s
length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening
position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,
calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume
settings.
Adaptive DRC (Adaptive dynamic range control)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in
conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful
when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When
“Adaptive DRC” is set to “Auto”, this unit controls the
dynamic range as follows:
– If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is
narrow
– If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range
is wide
y
• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal
sources by using “Dynamic Range” in “Sound” (page 78).
• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.
The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function
when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode (page 53).
Adaptive DSP Level (Adaptive DSP effect level)
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP
effect level (page 68) automatically in conjunction with
the volume level.
Even if you set “Adaptive DSP Level” to “Auto”, this unit does
not change but fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP Level”
(page 68).
Max Volume (Maximum volume)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main
zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud
sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is
Distance Adjusted speaker
Front L
Front left speaker
Front R
Front right speaker
Center
Center speaker
Surround L
Surround left speaker
Surround R
Surround right speaker
Surround Back L
Surround back left speaker
Surround Back R
Surround back right speaker
Front Presence L
Front presence left speaker
Front Presence R
Front presence right speaker
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Note
Level Adjusted speaker
Front L
Front left speaker
Front R
Front right speaker
Center
Center speaker
Surround L
Surround left speaker
Surround R
Surround right speaker
Surround Back L
Surround back left speaker
Surround Back R
Surround back right speaker
Front Presence L
Front presence left speaker
Front Presence R
Front presence right speaker
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Note
Setup (Volume)
Choice Functions
Auto
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Off
Does not adjust the dynamic range
automatically.
Note
Choice Functions
Auto
Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction
with the volume level.
Off
Does not adjust the DSP effect level
automatically.
Note
Input level
Output level
Output level
Input level
Auto
Off
Auto
Off
VOLUME: low VOLUME: high
78 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
–80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “Max Volume” is set
to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
Initial Volume (Initial volume)
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone
when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level
is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “Max
Volume” setting.
• The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the initial volume
setting.
Muting Type (Muting type)
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (page 43).
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.
■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the
LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the
capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE
channel carries low-frequency special effects which are
only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only
when this unit decodes bitstream signals.
Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone
(Headphone low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “Bass Out” (page 76), some
signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
jacks.
■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is
decoding bitstream signals.
Speaker (Speaker dynamic range)
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.
Headphone (Headphone dynamic range)
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the
headphones.
Notes
Choice Functions
Full
Mutes all the audio output.
–20dB
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
–40dB
Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.
Setup (Sound)
Note
Choice Functions
MAX
Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic
range.
STD
Adjusts the dynamic range to medium.
When this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD
signals, the dynamic range control is always
active regardless of the instruction of the
input source signals.
MIN/AUTO
• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to
narrow when this unit is decoding
bitstream signals (except Dolby TrueHD).
• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range
according to the instruction of the input
source signals when this unit is decoding
Dolby TrueHD signals.
79 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)
Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each
speaker.
PEQ Data Copy (Parametric equalizer data copy)
Use this feature to copy the result data of the automatic
setup to the manual configuration area. You can select the
parametric equalizer type applied to the copied result data
of the automatic setup. See page 39 for the descriptions of
each parametric equalizer type.
PEQ Select (Parametric equalizer type select)
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer type that
applied to the results of the automatic setup. See page 39
for the descriptions of each parametric equalizer type.
• When you carry out the automatic setup, this unit automatically
set “PEQ Select” to “Natural”.
• “Level” settings (page 77) also change corresponding to the
setting of “PEQ Select”.
• This unit does not change the configurations of “Manual” even
if you perform the automatic setup.
Manual parametric equalizer configuration of
each speaker
Use this feature to adjust the tonal quality of each speaker.
You can copy the results of the automatic setup for the
base of the manual configuration by using “PEQ Data
Copy”. Set “PEQ Select” to “Manual” in advance.
1 Press
9
k / n / l / h to select “Test Tone” or
the speaker you want to adjust.
Test Tone
Use this feature to select whether to turn on or off the
test tone output while you are adjusting the tonal
quality of each speaker.
2 Press
9
h to access the settings window.
3 Press
9
k / n / l / h to select “PARAM” and
then press
9
ENTER repeatedly to select a
parameter from “Band” (band), “Freq.”
(frequency) or “Q” (Q factor).
y
You can adjust “Gain” (gain) with any parameter.
Choice Descriptions
Flat h Manual
Copies the result of the automatic setup that
the “Flat” type parametric equalizer is
applied to.
Front h Manual
Manual Copies the result of the automatic
setup that the “Front” type parametric
equalizer is applied to.
Natural
h
Manual
Copies the result of the automatic setup that
the “Natural” type parametric equalizer is
applied to.
Choice Descriptions
Manual Applies the manually configured parametric
equalizer in “Setup”.
Flat
Applies the “Flat” type parametric equalizer.
Front
Applies the “Front” type parametric
equalizer.
Natural
Applies the “Natural” type parametric
equalizer.
Through
Does not use the parametric equalizer.
Notes
Choice Adjusted speaker
Front L
Front left speaker
Front R
Front right speaker
Center
Center speaker
Surround L
Surround left speaker
Surround R
Surround right speaker
Surround Back L
Surround back left speaker
Surround Back R
Surround back right speaker
Front Presence L
Front presence left speaker
Front Presence R
Front presence right speaker
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Choice Functions
On
Outputs the test tone.
Off
Does not output the test tone.
PEQ Data Copy
PEQ Select
Front L
Front R
Center
PARAM RESET
EDIT EXIT
Band / Gain
80 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
4 Press
9
n to select “EDIT” and press
9
ENTER to access the edit window.
For more information on the parametric equalizer and
each parameter, see page 132.
The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted.
• Press
9
l / h to adjust the parameter.
• Press
9
k / n to adjust the “Gain”.
• Press
9
ENTER to exit the edit window.
y
• When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu
as a graphic equalizer.
• “Band #5”, “Band #6”, and “Band #7” can adjust the
frequencies of above 500 Hz.
• When you select “Subwoofer” in step 1 and “Band” in step 3,
you can adjust “Band #1”, “Band #2”, “Band #3” and “Band
#4” only. In this case, “Band #1”, “Band #2”, “Band #3” and
“Band #4” adjust the frequencies of below 200 Hz.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied
with the results.
y
If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings
for the selected speaker, select “RESET” and press
9ENTER.
6 Select “EXIT” and press
9
ENTER to exit
from the settings window.
■ Tone Control (Tone control)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble
output to your speakers or headphones.
Tone Control is not effective when:
– the PURE DIRECT mode (page 53) is selected.
– MULTI CH is selected as the input source.
Control (Control mode)
y
“Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored
independently. The adjustments for “Speaker” affects the front
left/right speaker, center speaker and subwoofer channels.
Bass (Bass control)
Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 125 Hz, 350 Hz, 500 Hz
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Treble (Treble control)
Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 2.5 kHz, 3.5 kHz, 8.0 kHz
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Auto Bypass (Auto bypass)
Use this feature to select whether the audio output
bypasses the tone control circuitry when “Treble” and
“Bass” are set to 0 dB.
■ Lipsync
(Audio and video synchronization)
Mode (HDMI automatic lip sync mode)
If the video monitor is connected to the HDMI OUT jack
of this unit and compatible with the automatic audio and
video synchronization function (automatic lip sync), this
unit adjusts the audio and video synchronization
automatically. Use this feature to activate or deactivate the
automatic lip sync.
When “HDMI OUT SEL” is set to “OUT 1+2” and video
monitors are connected to both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI
OUT 2 jacks, the automatic lip sync function does not work
even if “Auto” is selected.
Auto (Automatic audio delay adjustment)
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and
video synchronization when you set “Mode” to “Auto”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Note
Choice Functions
Speaker
Adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers.
Headphone
Adjust the bass/treble balance of your
headphones.
PEQ Data Copy
PEQ Select
Front L
Front R
Center
Band #1
Gain 0.0dB
Freq 62.5Hz
Q1.000
Exit:ENTER
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically bypasses the tone control
circuitry to provide the purest signal possible
when “Treble” and “Bass” are set to 0 dB.
Off
Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.
Choice Descriptions
Auto
Select this setting if the connected video
monitor is compatible with the automatic lip
sync. Use “Auto” to fine adjust the audio and
video synchronization.
Manual
Select this setting if the video monitor is not
compatible with the automatic lip sync or you
do not want to use the automatic lip sync. Use
“Manual” to adjust the audio and video
synchronization.
Note
81 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
“Offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio
delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio
delay that you set in “Mode”. This unit stores the value of
“Offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync
compatible video monitors.
Manual (Manual audio delay adjustment)
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output
manually to synchronize audio with video images when
you set “Mode” to “Manual”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
■ Pure Direct (Pure Direct)
Use this feature to select whether this unit outputs the
video signals when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT
mode.
You cannot use the GUI menu while this unit is in the PURE
DIRECT mode even if “Pure Direct” is set to “Audio + Video”.
■ Channel Mute (Channel mute)
Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels.
Mode (Mode)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel
Mute” setting for each speaker.
Each speaker settings
Select whether this unit mutes each speaker channel when
you set “Mode” to “Enable”.
Use this menu to adjust the video parameters.
y
You can reset the all parameters in “Video” to the initial factory
settings by using “VIDEO” of “INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED
SETUP” (page 114).
■ Analog ` Analog
(Analog-to-analog video conversion)
Use this feature to enable or disable the video conversion
among the analog video jacks (VIDEO, S VIDEO, and
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks).
Choice Functions
Audio
Does not output video signals.
Audio + Video
Outputs video signals. For the better sound
quality, this unit only activates the limited video
features.
Note
Choice Functions
Disable
Deactivates the “Channel Mute” function.
Enable
Activates the “Channel Mute” function.
Channel Mute Speaker channel
Front L
Front left
Front R
Front right
Center
Center
Surround L
Surround left
Surround R
Surround right
Surround Back L
Surround back left
Surround Back R
Surround back right
Front Presence L
Front presence left speaker
Front Presence R
Front presence right speaker
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Choice Functions
Mute On
Mutes the selected speaker channel.
Mute Off
Does not mute the selected speaker channel.
Setup (Video)
Choice Functions
Through
Disables the video conversion among the analog
video jacks.
Conversion
Enables the video conversion among the analog
video jacks.
82 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
• Analog-to-HDMI video conversion is always possible unless
video signals are being input at the HDMI input jacks or 1080p-
resolution analog video signals are being input.
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals cannot
be output at the S VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted into component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “Analog ` Analog” to “Through”.
■ Analog ` HDMI (Analog-to-HDMI video
signal processing)
Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the
analog-to-HDMI video signals (input at VIDEO,
S VIDEO, or COMPONENT VIDEO input jacks and
output at HDMI OUT jacks).
■ HDMI ` HDMI
(HDMI-to-HDMI video signal processing)
Use this feature to select whether this unit processes the
HDMI-to-HDMI video signals (input at HDMI input jacks
and output at HDMI OUT jacks).
■ Processing
(HDMI video signal processing)
Use this feature to configure the resolution, aspect, and
progressive re-processing settings for the video signals
output at the HDMI OUT jacks.
This feature is available only when “Analog ` HDMI” or
“HDMI ` HDMI” is set to “Processing”.
Resolution (HDMI video signal resolution)
Use this feature to enable or disable the upscaling of the
analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or HDMI-to-HDMI
video signals.
This unit up-scales the video signals as follows:
• 480i(576i) → 480p(576p)/720p/1080i/1080p
• 480p(576p) → 720p/1080i/1080p
• 720p → 480p(576p)/1080i/1080p
• 1080i → 480p(576p)/720p/1080p
• 1080p → 480p(576p)/720p/1080i
Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)
Use this feature to select whether this unit converts the
aspect ratio of the analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or
HDMI-to-HDMI video signals.
• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this
unit automatically ignores the setting of “Aspect”.
• When “Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video images of the
edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.
Prog. Re-Processing (Progressive re-processing)
Use this feature to enable or disable the progressive re-
processing of the analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or
HDMI-to-HDMI video signals.
This setting is effective only for video signals of which
resolution is 480p (576p), 720p, or 1080p.
Adjustment (Video quality adjustments)
Use this feature to fine adjust the video quality of the
analog-to-HDMI video signals and/or HDMI-to-HDMI
video signals. You can also use the preset feature to save
up to six of your favorite video quality settings.
Notes
Choice Functions
Through
Select this setting when you do not want this
unit to process the analog-to-HDMI video
signals.
Processing
Select this setting when you want this unit to
apply the video processing configured in
“Processing” to the analog-to-HDMI video
signals.
Choice Functions
Through
Select this setting when you do not want this
unit to process the HDMI-to-HDMI video
signals.
Processing
Select this setting when you want this unit to
apply the video processing configured in
“Processing” to the HDMI-to-HDMI video
signals.
Note
Choice Functions
Through
Does not up-scale any video signals.
480p (or
576p), 1080i,
720p, 1080p
Up-scales video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i,
720p, or 1080p of resolution.
Choice Functions
Through
Does not make any adjustments to the aspect
ratio for the HDMI video signal sources.
16:9 Normal
Displays video images with the aspect ratio of
4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio
of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and
left sides as a result.
Smart Zoom Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3
to your video monitor with the aspect ratio of
16:9.
Notes
Choice Functions
Off
Disables the progressive re-processing of the
HDMI video signals.
On
Enables the progressive re-processing of the
HDMI video signals.
Note
83 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
1 Press
9
k / n repeatedly to select
“Adjustment” and then press
9
ENTER.
2 Press
9
l / h repeatedly to select a preset
number to which you want to save the video
quality adjustments and then press
9
ENTER.
y
To recall the preset video quality adjustments, press 9l /
h to select a preset number to recall, press 9ENTER
and then skip to step 8.
3
Press
9
n
to select “EDIT” and then press
9
ENTER
.
4
Press
9
l / h
repeatedly to select the video
quality parameter you want to adjust and then
press
9
n
to move to the adjustment field.
5 Press
9
l / h repeatedly to adjust the
setting of the selected video quality
parameter.
6
To adjust another video quality parameter,
press
9
k / n
repeatedly to select the
parameter field and then repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 Press
9
n to select “OK” and then press
9
ENTER.
y
To cancel the operation without change, press 9l / h
to select “CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.
8 Press
9
k / n / l / h to select “CLOSE” and
then press
9
ENTER.
Mosquito NR (Mosquito noise reduction)
Mosquito noise is a type of noise that appears along
edges of compression artifacts. Use this feature to
adjust the mosquito noise reduction level.
Choices: Off, Low, Medium, High
Block NR (Block noise reduction)
Block noise is often caused when the bitrate is too
low to accurately encode the video. Use this feature
to adjust the block noise reduction level.
Control range: 0 to 50
Detail Enhancement (Detail enhancement)
Use this feature to adjust finesses of images.
Control range: 0 to 50
Edge Enhancement (Edge enhancement)
Use this feature to adjust sharpness of images.
Control range: 0 to 50
Brightness (Brightness)
Use this feature to adjust brightness of images.
Control range: –50 to 50
Initial setting: 0
Contrast (Contrast)
Use this feature to adjust contrast of images.
Control range: –50 to 50
Initial setting: 0
Saturation (Saturation)
Use this feature to adjust saturation of images.
Control range: –50 to 50
Initial setting: 0
Use this feature to set the HDMI functions or check the
information about the video monitors connected to the
HDMI OUT jacks.
■ Standby Through (Standby through)
Mode (Standby through mode)
Use this feature whether this unit allows the HDMI signals
input at the HDMI IN jacks to pass thorough this unit
when this unit is in the standby mode. You can also
designate an HDMI IN jack and HDMI OUT jack(s) that
accept the signals when “Mode” is set to “Fix” and this
unit is in the standby mode.
Preset Select
123456
EDIT CLOSE
1 Mosquito NR
Off
OK CANCEL
Video quality parameter
Adjustment
Setup (HDMI)
Choice Functions
Off
Disables the HDMI standby through feature.
HDMI signals do not pass through this unit if
this unit is in the standby mode.
Last
HDMI signals pass through this unit (only from
the HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack(s)
used when this unit is set to the standby mode)
even when this unit is in the standby mode.
84 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
When “Mode” is set to “Last” or “Fix”, the amount of power
consumption in the standby mode increases.
Input (HDMI IN jack select)
Use this feature to select an HDMI IN jack that accepts
HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
This setting is available only when “Mode” is set to “Fix”.
Output (HDMI OUT jack select)
Use this feature to select HDMI OUT jack(s) that output
HDMI signals when this unit is in the standby mode.
This setting is available only when “Mode” is set to “Fix”.
■ Audio Output (HDMI audio output)
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jacks on the rear panel of
this unit.
y
If “Audio Output” is set to “TV” or “Amp + TV”, available
audio signals vary depending on the specification of the
connected video monitor.
■ Control Monitor (Control monitor)
Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack at which
HDMI control signals are output.
■ Monitor Info. (Monitor information)
Use this feature to check the information (interface and
frequency for each video resolution) about the video
monitors connected to the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI
OUT 2 jacks of this unit.
y
Press 9h repeatedly to toggle between “OUT1” (information
about the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack)
and “OUT2” (information about the video monitor connected to
the HDMI OUT 2 jack).
Use this menu to adjust the network parameters.
In case you changed your network configuration, you may
need to reconfigure the network settings.
y
You can reset the all parameters in “Network” to the initial
factory settings by using “NETWORK” of “INITIALIZE” in
“ADVANCED SETUP” (page 114).
■ Configuration (Network configurations)
Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP
address, etc.) or to change them manually.
DHCP (DHCP setting)
Use this feature to select whether this unit can obtain the
network parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway, primary DNS server and secondary DNS server)
from the DHCP server of the connected network.
IP Address (IP address)
Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to
this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for
other devices in the target network.
Fix
HDMI signals pass through this unit (from the
HDMI IN jack specified in “Input” to the HDMI
OUT jack(s) specified in “Output”) even when
this unit is in the standby mode.
Note
Note
Choice HDMI IN jack
IN1
HDMI IN1 (BD/HD DVD) jack
IN2
HDMI IN2 (DVD) jack
IN3
HDMI IN3 (CBL/SAT) jack
IN4
HDMI IN4 (DVR) jack
Front
HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack
Note
Choice HDMI IN jack
OUT1 + 2
HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks
OUT1
HDMI OUT 1 jack
OUT2
HDMI OUT 2 jack
Choice Functions
Amp
Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers
connected to this unit.
TV
Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers of
the TV connected to this unit. The speakers
connected to this unit are muted.
Amp + TV
Outputs HDMI audio signals at the speakers
connected to this unit and speakers of the TV
connected to this unit.
Choice Functions
Choice Functions
HDMI OUT1
Outputs HDMI control signals at the HDMI
OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT2
Outputs HDMI control signals at the HDMI
OUT 2 jack.
Setup (Network)
Note
Choice Descriptions
On
Select this setting when this unit can obtain the
network parameters from the DHCP server of
the connected network.
Off
Select this setting when you set the network
parameters manually.
85 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Subnet Mask (Subnet mask)
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value
assigned to this unit.
y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as
“255.255.255.0”.
Default Gateway (Default gateway)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default
gateway.
DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server)
DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary
and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in
“DNS Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses,
enter one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another in “DNS
Server (S)”.
■ Network Standby (Network standby)
Use this feature to select whether this unit accepts the
commands via LAN network when this unit is in the
standby mode.
When “Network Standby” is set to “On”, the amount of power
consumption in the standby mode increases.
■ Information (Network information)
Use this feature to display the network system
information.
MAC Address
(MAC (Media Access Control) address)
This information displays the MAC address that is
assigned to this unit.
Status (Network status)
This information displays the current link status of the
network.
Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, No Link,
Full Duplex, Half Duplex
“No Link” appears when network connection is not made.
System (System ID)
This information displays the system ID that is assigned to
this unit.
Use this menu to set the functions of the multi-zone
configuration.
■ Zone SP Assign
(Zone speaker assignment)
Use this feature to assign the speaker terminals for Zone 2
and Zone 3.
If you want use the external amplifiers for the all channels in the
main zone, you can use all the speaker terminals of this unit for
Zone 2 and/or Zone3 (pre-amplifier mode). Set “PREAMP
MODE” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to “ON” (page 114).
1 Press 9k / n to select the speaker terminal
and then press 9l / h repeatedly to select
the desired zone of which you want to use
the speakers.
M : Main zone
2 : Zone 2
3 : Zone 3
2 Press 9k / n to select “OK” and then press
9
ENTER to confirm the setting.
y
• To return to the previous menu level without change,
select “CANCEL” in step 2.
■ Component Assign
(Component assignment)
Use this feature to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO
(MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) jacks to the main zone or
another zone. Video signals are directed to the video
monitor in the selected zone if the corresponding input
source is selected.
Note
Choice Descriptions
Off
Does not accept the operations via LAN
network when this unit is in the standby mode.
On
Accepts the operations via LAN network when
this unit is in the standby mode.
Note
Note
Setup (Multi Zone)
Note
Choice Functions
Main
Select this setting when you want to connect the
video monitor in the main zone to the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT) jacks.
Zone2
Select this setting when you want to connect the
video monitor in the Zone 2 to the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT) jacks.
SP1
SP2
M23
Zone :
SP Terminal :
–23
OK
CANCEL
Zone4 Set
Zone OSD
Zone SP Assign
Component Assign
Party Mode Set
86 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
• The video conversion function does not work for the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) jacks
if “Component Assign” is set to “Zone2”, “Zone3”, or “Zone4”.
• The COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
jacks do not output OSD signals.
■ Party Mode Set (Party mode settings)
The party mode enables you to play the same source in
multiple zones simultaneously (page 112). Use this
feature to enable or disable the party mode in each zone.
Target: Zone2/Target: Zone3/Target: Zone4
(Party mode target zone setting)
■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set
(Zone 2/Zone 3 settings)
Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume
(Zone 2/Zone 3 volume)
Use this menu to select whether this unit controls the
volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE
OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks.
When “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is set to “Fixed”,
you cannot select the following parameters:
– Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol.
– Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol.
Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3 Maximum volume setting)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15 .0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes
priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.”
setting.
Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3 initial volume setting)
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone
3 when the power of each zone is turned on.
Control range: Off, Mute, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes
priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.”
setting.
Zone2 Balance/Zone3 Balance
(Zone 2/Zone 3 balance)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the volume of the
left and right channels in each zone.
Choices: L10 to L1, 0, R1 to R10
Zone2 Tone Control/Zone3 Tone Control
(Zone 2/Zone 3 tone control)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble
output to the selected zone.
Choices: Bass (Bass control), Treble (Treble control)
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Zone2 Mono/Zone3 Mono
(Zone 2/Zone 3 monaural mode)
Use this feature to select whether you play back sources
monaurally in the selected zone.
Zone3
Select this setting when you want to connect the
video monitor in the Zone 3 to the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT) jacks.
Zone4
Select this setting when you want to connect the
video monitor in the Zone 4 to the
COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT) jacks.
Notes
Choice Descriptions
Disable
Select this setting to exclude the selected zone
from the party mode coverage. You can select
the input source of the selected zone
independently even if this unit is in the party
mode.
Enable
Select this setting to include the selected zone to
the party mode coverage.
Choice Descriptions
Fixed
Select this setting when you want to control the
volume level of the selected zone on the external
amplifier. This unit fixes the ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard
line level.
Variable
Select this setting when you want to control the
volume level of the selected zone on this unit.
You can adjust the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or
ZONE 3) volume level simultaneously with
J
VOLUME +/– on the remote control.
Note
Note
Note
Choice Descriptions
Off
Turns off the monaural playback mode. This
unit plays back sources in stereo.
On
Turns on the monaural playback mode. This unit
mixes down the left and right channel signals
and plays the sources monaurally.
87 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Zone2 Muting Type/Zone3 Muting Type
(Zone 2/Zone 3 muting type)
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume of the selected zone.
■ Zone OSD (Zone on-screen display)
Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2,
Zone 3, and Zone 4 on the Zone 2 video monitor
connected to the ZONE VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of
this unit.
■ Zone Rename (Zone Rename)
Main/Zone2/Zone3/Zone4
(Main/Zone 2/Zone 3/Zone 4 rename)
Use this feature to edit the name of the selected zone.
1 Press 9k / n / l / h to select a character or
function and then press 9ENTER to
confirm the selection.
Repeat step 1 until you input a name you want to use.
2 Press 9k / n / l / h to select “SAVE” and
then press 9ENTER.
y
• To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press
9ENTER.
• To cancel the operation without change, select
“CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.
This menu adjusts the optional system settings.
■ Memory Guard (Memory guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound
field program parameter values and other system settings.
y
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, “ ” appears on the left
side of the name of a parameter being protected.
■ I/O Assignment
(Input/output assignment)
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the IINPUT
selector (or the input selector buttons (3)).
Example: Assigning the CD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL jack to “MD/CD-R”.
1 Press 9ENTER to display the
“I/O Assignment” screen.
2 Press 9k / n /l / h to select the cell in row
“MD/CD-R”, column “Coax In” and then
press 9ENTER.
3 Press 9l / h to select “1” and then press
9ENTER.
Select “None” to clear the existing assignment.
y
To return to the previous screen without change, press
9k.
Choice Functions
Full
Mutes all the audio output.
–20dB
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
–40dB
Reduces the current volume by 40 dB.
Choice Functions
Off
Turns off the zone on-screen display feature.
Zone2
Displays the operational status of Zone 2 only.
All
Displays the operational status of Zone 2, Zone
3 and Zone 4.
Setup (Option)
Choice Functions
Off
Turns off the “Memory Guard” feature.
On
Protects the following parameters:
– sound field program parameters
– GUI menu parameters
– speaker levels settings
1
2
4
8
5
6
A
B
IN 1
IN 2
PHONO
CD
TV
MD/CD-R
BD/HD DVD
DVD
Coax
In
Opt
In
Opt
Out
Comp
In
HDMI
In
EXIT
88 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
4 Press 9k / n /l / h to select “EXIT” and
then press 9ENTER.
y
You cannot select a specific item more than once for the
same type of jack.
■ Input Rename (Input rename)
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the GUI screen and in the front panel
display.
1 Press 9k / n /l / h to select a character or
function and then press 9ENTER to
confirm the selection.
Repeat step 1 until you input a name you want to use.
2 Press 9k / n /l / h to select “SAVE” and
then press 9ENTER.
y
• To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press
9ENTER.
• To cancel the operation without change, select
“CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.
■ Display Set (Display settings)
Front Panel Display (Front panel display setting)
Dimmer (Dimmer)
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front
panel display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Scroll (Front panel display message scroll)
Use this feature to set the front panel display message
scroll pattern.
Short Message (Short message display)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message
display displayed in the GUI screen in the main zone.
The short message display (except some status messages) does
not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i
or 1080p resolutions are input.
Playback Screen (Playback screen display time)
Use this feature to set the playback screen display time.
y
This setting is applied to the GUI screen in the main zone and
OSD in Zone 2, Zone 3, or Zone 4.
Position (GUI screen position)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal
position of the GUI screen.
Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)
Wall Paper (Wall paper)
Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray
background in your video monitor when there is no video
signal being input.
Choice Functions
Continue
Continuous mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
Once
Scroll-once mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
Choice Functions
On
Activates the short message display function.
Off
Deactivates the short message display function.
Note
Choice Functions
Always
Displays the menu unceasingly during an
operation.
10sec
Turns off the menu 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
30sec
Turns off the menu 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Button Moving direction of the GUI display
9k
Up
9n
Down
9h
Right
9l
Left
Choice Functions
None
Does not display any background in your video
monitor.
Piano
Displays a background image (the photograph
of a piano) in your monitor when there is no
video signal being input.
Horn
Displays a background image (the photograph
of a horn) in your monitor when there is no
video signal being input.
Electric Guitar
Displays a background image (the photograph
of an electric guitar) in your monitor when there
is no video signal being input.
Gray
Display a gray background in your monitor
when there is no video signal being input.
89 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ iPod (iPod settings)
Standby Charge
(iPod charge on the standby mode)
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode.
■ Initial Set (Initial settings)
Audio Select (Default audio input jack select)
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting (page 42) for the input sources connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode)
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode
(page 52) for the input sources when you turn on the
power of this unit.
EXTD Surround (Default extended surround
decoder mode setting)
Use this feature to designate the extended surround
decoder mode (page 53) for the input sources connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
■ Trigger Output (Trigger output)
Use this feature to select the functions of each TRIGGER
OUT jack of this unit.
Trigger Mode (Trigger mode)
Target Zone (Target zone)
This setting is not available when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Manual”.
Input Level (Input level)
Select the input source and then set the input level applied
to the selected input source.
This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Source”.
Choice Functions
Auto
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when
this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.
Off
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only
when this unit is turned on.
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically detects the type of audio input
signals and selects the appropriate audio input
jack select setting.
Last
Automatically selects the last audio input jack
select setting used for the connected input
source.
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically detects the type of input signals
and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.
Last
Automatically selects the last decoder mode
setting used for the connected input source.
Choice Functions
Auto
Automatically detects the input digital audio
signals and activates the appropriate decoder.
Last
Selects the last selected extended surround
decoder mode.
Choice Function
Trigger1
Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 1
jack.
Trigger2
Sets the functions for the TRIGGER OUT 2
jack.
Choice Descriptions
Power
Select this setting to send the voltage signals at
the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the
selected zone is turned on.
Source
Select this setting to send the voltage signals at
the selected TRIGGER OUT jack while the
selected input source is selected.
Manual
Select this setting to send the voltage signals
manually.
Note
Choice Target zone
Main
Main zone
Zone2
Zone 2
Zone3
Zone 3
Zone4
Zone 4
All
Main zone, Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone 4
Note
Choice Descriptions
High
Sends the voltage when the input source is
selected.
Low
Stops sending the voltage when the input source
is selected.
90 En
Graphical user interface (GUI) menu
Manual Test (Manual test)
This setting is available only when “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Manual”.
Use this feature to select the language of the menu items
and messages.
Choices: English (English), (Japanese),
Français (French), Deutsch (German),
Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)
y
You can also select the display language with the
“LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP”
(page 115).
··· The selected language is displayed.
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu
items and messages are displayed in English.
Note
Choice Functions
High
Sends the voltage signals.
Low
Stops sending the voltage signals.
Language
Language GUI menu
Front panel
display
Zone OSD
Русский
(Russian)
—
(Japanese)
——
Other
languages
91 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this feature to save and recall up to six of your favorite
setting for the main zone. You can also save up to four of
your favorite settings for Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4.
■ Saving by the
7
SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons
You can save the system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding
7
SYSTEM
MEMORY buttons.
Press and hold one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds.
“Memory1 SAVE” (example) appears in the front panel
display, and then this unit saves the current system setting
to the corresponding memory number.
y
• If system settings are already stored in the selected memory
number, this unit overwrites the old settings.
• To save the system settings for Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4, press
HZONE on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired
zone and then press and hold one of the 7SYSTEM
MEMORY buttons for 4 seconds. To save the system settings
for the selected zone, the zone should be turned on.
• This unit saves the parameters in the groups you select by using
the GUI menu when you save the parameters by using the
7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
• You can also use FSYSTEM MEMORY buttons on the front
panel.
■ Saving by the GUI menu operation
You can save the current system settings stored in
“Memory1” to “Memory6” by using the “System
Memory” menu in the GUI menu.
1 Set the operation mode selector on the
remote control to FAMP and then press
IMENU.
y
If the menu directory other than “Top Menu” (page 67) is
displayed, press and hold IMENU to display the top GUI
menu.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “Setup”
and then press 9h.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “System
Memory” and then press 9h.
4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
zone and then press 9h.
5 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx Save”
and then press 9h.
“xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 4.
6 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
memory number and then press 9ENTER.
The list of the parameter groups to be saved appears. Available
parameter groups vary depending on the selected zone.
y
• If system settings are already stored in the selected memory
number, this unit overwrites the old settings.
• To load the system settings with the 7SYSTEM MEMORY
button operation, use one of “Memory1” to “Memory4”.
7 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter group and then press 9ENTER
to check or uncheck the box.
Check the boxes for the parameter groups to be saved.
For details on parameters to be saved, see
“Parameters to be saved” (page 92).
8 Press 9k / n / l / h repeatedly to select
“SAVE” and then press 9ENTER to save
the current system settings to the selected
memory number.
y
To cancel the operation, select “CANCEL” and then press
9ENTER.
9 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.
■ Renaming the stored settings
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Saving by the GUI
menu operation” (page 91).
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx
Rename” and then press 9h.
“xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 1.
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
Saving the system settings
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
Main Save
Input/HDMI Out
Audio
Volume
SP Config
Video/Display Set
Others
SAVE
CANCEL
92 En
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
memory number and then press 9h.
4 Press 9k / n / l / h to select a character or
function and then press 9ENTER to
confirm the selection.
Repeat step 4 until you input a name you want to use.
5 Press 9k / n / l / h to select “SAVE” and
then press 9ENTER.
y
• To reset the name, select “RESET” and then press 9ENTER.
• To cancel the operation without change, select “CANCEL” and
then press 9ENTER.
6 Press IMENU to turn off the GUI menu.
If you change the language setting (page 90 or 115), names of
the memory settings will be automatically reset.
■ Parameters to be saved
The parameter groups indicated in bold are selected by
default.
Main zone parameters
Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone 4 parameters
For zone 4, only the input source setting is saved.
If you load the system settings, the settings currently configured
are overwritten. If you do not want to erase the current settings,
save the settings using the System Memory feature in advance.
■ Loading by the
7
SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons
You can recall the system settings stored in “Memory1” to
“Memory4” by pressing the corresponding 7SYSTEM
MEMORY buttons.
Note
Group Parameters Page
Input/HDMI
Out
Audio Select
73
Decoder Mode
73
Input source 41
HDMI OUT SEL
42
Audio Stereo/Surround
68
PURE DIRECT on/off 53
EXTD SUR. setting 53
Adaptive DRC
77
Adaptive DSP Level
77
LFE Level
78
Dynamic Range
78
Tone Control
80
Pure Direct
81
CINEMA DSP 3D mode on/off 51
Volume Volume level
41
SP Config Parametric EQ
79
Configuration
75
Distance
76
Level
77
Information (Auto Setup)
39
Setup Menu (Auto Setup)
34
Video/
Display Set
Analog ` Analog
81
Analog ` HDMI
82
HDMI ` HDMI
82
Processing
82
Short Message
88
Playback Screen
88
Position
88
Wall Paper
88
Others Lipsync
80
Front Panel Display
88
Audio Output
84
Parameter Descriptions Page
Input
Input source
110
Vo l u m e
Volume level
110
Tone Control
Tone control settings
111
Note
Loading the system settings
Note
Group Parameters Page
93 En
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
1 Press one of the 7SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons on the remote control to select the
desired memory number.
“Memory1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front
panel display.
y
• “Empty” appears in the menu screen if no system settings
are stored in the selected memory number.
• You can also use FSYSTEM MEMORY buttons on the
front panel.
2 Press the selected
7
SYSTEM MEMORY
button once more to confirm the selection.
This unit loads the settings stored in the selected
memory number.
■ Loading by the GUI menu operation
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in “Saving by the GUI
menu operation” (page 91).
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “xxx Load”
and then press 9h.
“xxx” indicates the zone you selected in step 1.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
memory number and then press 9ENTER.
y
If the memory number you selected is empty, “Memory
Empty” appears.
4 Press 9k / n / l / h repeatedly to select
“LOAD” and then press 9ENTER to load
the settings stored in the selected memory
number.
y
To cancel the operation and return to the previous menu,
select “CANCEL” and then press 9ENTER.
5 Press
I
MENU to turn off the GUI menu.
■ Example 1: Comparing the results of the
automatic setup and manual setup
This unit is equipped with three types of parametric
equalizer settings (page 79), and you can also make your
customized configuration of the sound settings of this unit
by using the “Speaker” parameters (page 75). To compare
the results of the automatic setup or your manual
configuration, use the 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
Saving each setting
1 Perform the automatic setup (page 34).
2 Press and hold
7
SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the results of the automatic setup
(PEQ Select: Natural) to “Memory1”.
3 Set “PEQ Select” to “Front” (page 79).
4 Press and hold
7
SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the results of the automatic setup
(PEQ Select: Front) to “Memory2”.
5 Configure the parameters of “Speaker”
(page 75) and parametric equalizer
configuration of each speaker manually
(page 79).
6 Press and hold
7
SYSTEM MEMORY 3 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the settings configured manually to
“Memory3”.
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
Using examples
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
Results of the automatic setup
(PEQ Select: Natural)
SYSTEM MEMORY 2
Results of the automatic setup
(PEQ Select: Front)
SYSTEM MEMORY 3
Settings configured manually
94 En
Saving and recalling the system settings (System Memory)
■ Example 2: Switching the settings for
different room environments
The tonal characteristics of the listening room may vary
depending on the situations of the room (for example,
whether the curtains are open or closed), and the settings
of this unit should be arranged for each situation of the
room. You can switch between the settings of this unit
easily by using 7SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
Saving each setting
1 Close the curtains of the listening room and
then perform the automatic setup (page 34).
2 Press and hold
7
SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the settings for the current room
situation (i.e. the curtains are closed) to “Memory1”.
3 Open the curtains of the listening room and
the perform the automatic setup.
4 Press and hold
7
SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the current room situation (i.e. the
curtains are open) to “Memory2”.
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
The settings when the curtains of the
listening room are closed
SYSTEM MEMORY 2
The settings when the curtains of
the listening room are open
95 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can operate this unit by using a Web browser. You can select the input source and sound field program, browse the
iPod or USB/network contents, select the preset items, and adjust the parameters of this unit by using the graphical user
interface (Web Control Center) that appears in the Web browser. Check the IP address of this unit by using “IP Address”
in “Network” menu (page 84) in advance, and then enter the IP address to the Web browser to access this unit to control
it.
y
• To use this feature, this unit and your PC must be connected properly in the network (page 28).
• We recommend that you use Windows Internet Explorer 6 or 7 that is installed on Windows XP or Windows Vista PC to access this
unit.
• You can select whether this unit accepts the controls by using the Web browser when this unit is in the standby mode (page 85).
• You can register the MAC address of the PCs you want to use to control this unit and limit the PCs that can control this unit by using
the Web browser. You can select that this unit allows the access to this unit by the PCs whose MAC addresses are registered to this unit
or allows the access by any PCs by using “MAC FILTER” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (page 114)
Controlling this unit by using the Web browser (Web Control Center)
Power on/offSelecting the input source
Controlling USB/
Network features
And many other features...Adjusting the system parameters
Web browser
PC
Control
96 En
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (page 99).
■ Controlling this unit
Set the operation mode selector to
F
AMP to control this
unit.
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component
operation mode selector is set to
F
AMP.
■ Controlling a TV
Set the operation mode selector to
F
TV to control your
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate
remote control code for the TV operation mode in advance
(page 99).
y
If no code has been set for the TV operation mode, the remote
control operates the component that is set to the TV control area
(page 99).
*1 2TV POWER can always turn on or off the power of the TV
regardless of the operation mode selector position.
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to
F
TV. For details, see the “TV” column on
page 97.
*3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to
F
TV or
F
SOURCE.
Remote control features
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-A UX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DVR VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
MEMORY
SUBMENU
RETURN
PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
MUTE
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
3D DSP
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
CLASSICAL
1
LIVE/CLUB
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
STEREO
5
ENHANCER
6
SUR.DECODE
7
STRAIGHT
8
PURE DIRECT
ENT
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
SLEEP
TV
PA RT Y
MUTE
INPUT
9 0
HDMI OUT
LEVEL
TV CH
INFO
TV VOL
EXTD SUR.
10
REC
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
Set to AMP
*1
*1
*2
*2
Notes
Remote control Functions
TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level.
TV CH +/– Changes the TV channel.
TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT Changes the input source.
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-A UX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DVR VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
MEMORY
SUBMENU
RETURN
PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
MUTE
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
3D DSP
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
CLASSICAL
1
LIVE/CLUB
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
STEREO
5
ENHANCER
6
SUR.DECODE
7
STRAIGHT
8
PURE DIRECT
ENT
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
SLEEP
TV
PA RT Y
MUTE
INPUT
9 0
HDMI OUT
LEVEL
TV CH
INFO
TV VOL
EXTD SUR.
10
REC
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
Set to TV
*1
*2
*2
*3
97 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Controlling other components
Set the operation mode selector to FSOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons
(3) or , . You must set the appropriate remote
control code for each input source in advance (page 99).
The following table shows the function of each control
button used to control other components assigned to each
input selector button (3). Be advised that some buttons
may not correctly operate the selected component.
y
The remote control has 16 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 16
different components.
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a power button.
*2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder, etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR
(page 99).
A
B
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-A UX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DVR VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
MENUTITLE
STATUS
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
MEMORY
SUBMENU
RETURN
PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
MUTE
3D DSP
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
CLASSICAL
1
LIVE/CLUB
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
STEREO
5
ENHANCER
6
SUR.DECODE
7
STRAIGHT
8
PURE DIRECT
ENT
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
SLEEP
TV
PA RT Y
MUTE
INPUT
9 0
HDMI OUT
LEVEL
TV CH
INFO
TV VOL
EXTD SUR.
10
REC
[
1
]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[3]
Set to SOURCE
Blu-ray Disc/
HD DVD
player/
recorder
DVD player LD player
DVD
recorder/
Digital
video
recorder
VCR TV
Cable TV/
Satellite
tuner
CD player
MD
recorder/
CD
recorder
Tape deck Tuner
[1] AV P O W E R
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
DVR power
*2
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
[2] TITLE,
BAND
Title Title Title Title Band
[3] PRESET/
CH k
Menu up Menu up Menu up Channel up Menu up Channel up Menu up
PRESET/
CH n
Menu down Menu down Menu down
Channel
down
Menu down
Channel
down
Menu down
A-E l Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left
A-E h Menu right Menu right Menu right Menu right
Direction
A/B
Menu right
ENTER Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter
[4] RETURN,
MEMORY
Return Return Return Return Memory
[5] REC Record
(recorder)
Disc skip Record Record
DVR record
*2
DVR record
*2
Disc skip Record Record
e Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause
DVR pause
*2
DVR pause
*2
Pause Pause Pause
p Play Play Play Play Play
DVR play
*2
DVR play
*2
Play Play Play
s Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop
DVR stop
*2
DVR stop
*2
Stop Stop Stop
ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
DVR search
backward
*2
DVR search
backward
*2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
hh
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
DVR search
forward
*2
DVR search
forward
*2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
b
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
DVR skip
backward
*2
DVR skip
backward
*2
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Direction A
a Skip forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
DVR skip
forward
*2
DVR skip
forward
*2
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Direction B
[6] 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
[7] MENU,
SRCH
MODE
Menu Menu Menu Menu
Search
mode
[8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
[9] ENT
Index Index
Chapter/
time
Index Enter Enter Enter Index Index Enter
[10] AUDIO Audio Audio Audio Audio
Notes
98 En
Remote control features
■ Selecting a component to be controlled
You can select a component to be controlled
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons (3).
Press
5
SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the
desired component.
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the
display window (4) on the remote control.
■ Controlling optional components
(Option mode)
“OPTN1” and “OPTN2” are optional component control
areas that can be programmed with remote control
functions independently from any input source. These
areas are useful for programming commands that are to be
used only as a part of a macro function or for components
that do not have a valid remote control code.
To select the option mode, press
5
SELECT l /
h repeatedly until “OPTN1” or “OPTN2” appears
in the display window (4) on the remote control.
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional areas. See
page 101 to program buttons operated within this component
control area.
Use the setup mode of the remote control to customize the
remote control.
1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using
a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
setup mode.
3 After the configurations, press GSETUP
again to exit from the setup menu.
If you do not complete each of the operations within 30
seconds, this unit automatically exits from the setup menu.
Note
DVD
or
OPTN1 OPTN2
Customizing the remote control
Setup
mode
Descriptions
Page
SETUP
Top setup mode menu.
—
LEARN
Learning mode. Use this feature to program
codes from other remote controls.
101
P-SET
Preset mode. Use this feature to change the
remote control code of each control area.
99
RNAME
Renaming mode. Use this feature to change
the name of each control area.
102
MACRO
Macro programming mode. Use this
feature to set the macro program.
103
CLEAR
Clearing mode. Use this feature to clear the
configurations of this unit.
105
ERASE
Erase mode. Use this feature to erase the
learned functions of each button.
105
EX-IR
Extended IR code mode. This feature is for
the authorized custom installers only.
—
LIGHT
Backlight mode. Use this feature to set the
light up mode of the remote control.
99
Note
99 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
1 Press GSETUP on the remote control using
a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the
remote control.
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LIGHT”
and then press 9ENTER.
“LIGHT” and the current “LIGHT” setting appears in
the display window (4) alternately.
3 Press 9k / n to select the desired setting
and then press 9ENTER.
4 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup
mode.
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” in
“Appendix” (separate booklet).
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each control area.
Remote control code default settings
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if
a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code.
1 Check the remote control code for your
component in advance.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
see “List of remote control codes” in “Appendix”
(separate booklet).
2 Set the operation mode selector on the
remote control to FSOURCE.
If you want to set the remote control code for “TV”,
set the operation mode selector to FTV.
Setting the backlight mode of the
remote control
Choice Descriptions
ON
Lights up the backlight when a button is
pressed.
OFF
Lights up the backlight only when
6LIGHT is pressed.
LIGHT
Setting remote control codes
Control
area
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
MULTI DVD Yamaha 04306
V-AUX — — —
PHONO — — —
DOCK SOURCE Yamaha 00012
BD
HD DVD
BD Yamaha 04706
DVD DVD Yamaha 04306
CD CD Yamaha 01205
MD
CD-R
CD-R Yamaha 01405
CBL
SAT
———
TV — — —
DVR DVR Yamaha 00707
VCR — — —
TUNER SOURCE Yamaha 00012
———
———
USB
NET
SOURCE Yamaha 00012
Note
A
B
100 En
Remote control features
3 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the
remote control.
4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “P-SET”
and then press 9ENTER.
The remote control enters the preset mode. “P-SET”
and name of the currently selected control area
appears in the display window (4) alternately.
5 Press an input selector button (3) or
5SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the
control area you want to customize.
If you selected “TV” in step 2, skip this step.
6 Press 9ENTER.
The current code setting appears.
7 Press the numeric buttons (B) to enter the
five-digit remote control code for your
component.
8 Press 9ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window (4) if setting
was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window (4) if the
setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from
step 5.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for
another control area, repeat steps 5 through 8.
9 Press
G
SETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.
10 Press
2
AV POWER or
A
p to confirm
whether you can control your component
using the remote control.
y
• If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your
component has more than one code, try each of them until you
find the correct one.
• If you set “00012” as the remote control code of the selected
control area, you can operate the currently selected internal
source (DOCK or USB/NET).
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the learning feature (page 101) or use the
remote control supplied with the component.
• Functions programmed using the learning mode take priority
over remote control code functions.
SETUP
P-SET
DVD
04306
OK
Notes
101 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use the learning feature if you want to program
functions not included in the basic operations covered by
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control
code is not available. You can program the function of
other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas
in the following illustration. The buttons can be
programmed independently for each control area.
• The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn
most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program
some special signals or extremely long transmissions.
• You cannot program the desired remote control code even if you
select the buttons in the highlighted area in the above
illustration depending on the selected control area and the
assigned library.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
FSOURCE and then press an input selector
button (3) to select the desired control area.
If you want to program the remote control code for
“TV”, set the operation mode selector to FTV.
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to
F
SOURCE or FTV. When you set the operation mode
selector to FAMP and program a remote control codes
from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot
operate the amplifier function of this unit.
2 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “LEARN”
and then press 9ENTER.
4 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2
to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other and
then press 9ENTER.
“L–KEY” appears in the display window (4).
5 Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“START” appears in the display window (4).
6 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window (4).
“NG” appears in the display window (4) if learning
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
y
When you want to program another function, repeat steps
4 through 6.
Programming codes from other
remote controls
Notes
Note
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-AU X DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DVR VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
MEMORY
SUBMENU
RETURN
PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
MUTE
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
REC
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
MEMORY
SUBMENU
RETURN
PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
MUTE
3D DSP
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
CLASSICAL
1
LIVE/CLUB
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
STEREO
5
ENHANCER
6
SUR.DECODE
7
STRAIGHT
8
PURE DIRECT
ENT
AUDIO SEL
AUDI O
SLEEP
TV
PAR TY
MUTE
INPUT
9 0
HDMI OUT
LEVEL
TV CH
INFO
TV VOL
EXTD SUR.
10
REC
Set to
SOURCE
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-A UX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DV R VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
SUBMENU
RETURN
PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
VOLU ME
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
Other remote control
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-A UX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DV R VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
SUBMENU
RETURN
PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-A UX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DV R VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
VOLU ME
PRESET/CH
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
Other remote control
OK
102 En
Remote control features
7 Press
G
SETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning (page 105).
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
You can change the name of the control area (input
source) that appears in the display window (4) on the
remote control.
1 Set the operation mode selector to
FSOURCE and then press an input selector
button (3) to select the desired control area.
2 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “RNAME”
and then press 9ENTER.
4 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select 3-letter
name or 5-lettered name you want to edit and
then press 9ENTER.
Each control area has both 3-letter name and 5-letter
name. You can rename the 3-letter name and 5-letter
name independently.
5 Edit the name of the control area.
To locate the position to edit, press 9l / h.
To select a character, press 9k / n.
y
Press 9k to change the character in the following order,
or press 9n to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a to z,
0 to 9, space, symbols (–, +, /, :).
6 Press 9ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window (4) on the
remote control if renaming was successful.
y
When you want to rename the another control area, press
the input selector button (3) or 5SELECT l / h
repeatedly to select the desired control area and then press
9ENTER and then carry out the operations of steps 4
through 6.
7 Press
G
SETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.
“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
Notes
Changing source names in the
display window
BD BD/HD
3-letter name 5-letter name
Note
BD/HD
103 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The macro programming feature makes it possible to
perform a series of operations with the press of a single
button. For example, when you want to play a CD,
normally you would turn on the components, select the
CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The
macro programming feature lets you perform all of these
operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with
macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(page 104).
■ Recalling programmed macro-
operations
1 Press HMACRO on the remote control.
2 Press the desired macro button.
“M:the 3-letter name of the selected control area” (for
example, “M:DVD”) appears in the display window
(4), and this unit transmits the programmed
functions. When you press DSTANDBY or
EPOWER, “M:STB” or “M:PWR” appears in the
display window (4), and this unit transmits the
programmed functions.
3 Press HMACRO again to exit from the
macro-operation mode.
• While the remote control is running a macro program (the
transmission indicator flashes), it does not accept any other
operation.
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
• If you do not complete each of the operations within 30
seconds, this unit automatically exits from the macro-operation
mode.
■ Default macro functions
*1 Set the appropriate remote control code for TV in advance
(page 99).
Macro programming features
Notes
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-A UX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DVR VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
MACRO
Macro buttons
MACRO
Pressing
macro
button
To automatically transmit these
signals in order
First Second
—
STANDBY STANDBY
POWER
POWER
POWER
TV
(*1)
MULTI MULTI
V-AUX V-AUX
PHONO PHONO
DOCK DOCK
BD
HD DVD
BD
HD DVD
DVD DVD
CD CD
MD
CD-R
MD
CD-R
CBL
SAT
CBL
SAT
TV TV
DVR DVR
VCR VCR
TUNER TUNER
A
A
B B
USB
NET
USB
NET
104 En
Remote control features
■ Programming macro operations
You can program your own macro to transmit several
remote control commands in sequence at the press of a
button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform
learning operations before programming the macro.
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
• We do not recommend that you program continuous operations
(for example, volume control) in a macro.
1 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “MACRO”
and then press 9ENTER.
3 Press the desired macro button you want to
assign the macro program to and then press
9ENTER.
“M:the three-letter name of the selected macro
button” (for example, “M:DVD”) and the name of the
currently selected control area appears in the display
window (4) alternately.
When you press DSTANDBY or EPOWER,
“M:STB” or “M:PWR” and the name of the currently
selected control area appears in the display window
(4) alternately.
4 Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
Example
Set the input source to DVD
→ Turn on the DVD
player
→ Turn on the video monitor
Step 1 (“MCR1”): Press DVD.
Step 2 (“MCR2”): Press AV POWER.
Step 3 (“MCR3”): Press TV POWER.
•
To change the selected input area, press
5
SELECT
l
/
h
.
Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,
whereas
5
SELECT
l
/
h
only changes the selected input area.
• The position of the operation mode selector (AMP/TV/
SOURCE) affects the assigned function. When the
operation mode selector is set to FAMP or FTV, the
input source selectors do not function.
5 Press HMACRO to confirm the program.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits from the macro
programming mode.
6 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.
“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press more
than one button simultaneously.
Notes
Notes
Note
Indicates the number of macro
steps entered
Flashes alternately so you can set the
next step
(Selected macro button)
(Selected control area)
MCR 1
M:DVD
DVD
DVD CD
V-AUX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DVR VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
STANDBY
POWER
BA
1
23
105 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed control area names
and setup remote control ID.
■ Clearing function sets
1 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “CLEAR”
and then press 9ENTER.
3 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select the desired
clear mode.
4 Press and hold 9ENTER for about 3
seconds.
When the clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the
display window (4).
• “NG” appears in the display window (4) if clearing was
unsuccessful.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more
than one button simultaneously.
5 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup
mode.
■ Clearing a learned function
1 Press GSETUP using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).
2 Press 9k / n repeatedly to select “ERASE”
and then press 9ENTER.
3 Set the operation mode selector to
F
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button (3).
If you want to erase the function learned in the AMP
or TV control area, set the operation mode selector to
F
AMP or
F
TV.
4 Press 9ENTER.
“E-KEY” appears in the display window (4).
5 Press and hold the button you want to clear
for about 3 seconds.
If clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the display
window (4).
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 3 through 5.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
6 Press GSETUP again to exit from the setup
menu.
• “NG” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control
if clearing was unsuccessful.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press more
than one button simultaneously.
Clearing configurations
Clear mode Descriptions
L:DVD (etc.)
(L:Three-digit name of the selected control area)
Clears all learned functions the respective
control area. You can change the control area to
be cleared by pressing the desired input selector
button (3) or 5SELECT l / h repeatedly.
L:AMP
Sets all learned functions for controlling the
amplifier functions to the initial factory settings.
Set the operation mode selector to FAMP to
select this clear mode.
L:TV
Clears all learned functions for TV control area.
Set the operation mode selector to FTV to
select this clear mode.
L:ALL
Clears all learned functions.
M:DVD (etc.)
(M:Name of the selected macro button) Clears
the macro programmed for the selected macro
button (page 104). The assigned macro to the
selected macro button reverts to the initial
factory macro. Press the desired macro button if
you want to change the macro button you want to
clear the programmed functions of.
M:ALL
Clears all programmed macros. The assigned
macro to the selected macro button reverts to the
initial factory macro.
RNAME
Set all the name of the control areas to the
default settings.
FCTRY
Set all settings of the remote control to the initial
factory settings.
Notes
Notes
106 En
Remote control features
Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit.
■ Setting the controlling zone of the
simplified remote control
Use this feature to set the controlling zone (page 110) and
remote control ID (page 114) of the simplified remote
control.
Setting the remote control ID
• ID1: Press and hold l (left cursor) and 1 for 3
seconds.
• ID2: Press and hold l (left cursor) and 2 for 3
seconds.
Setting the controlling zone
• Main zone: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 1 for 3
seconds.
• Zone 2: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 2 for 3
seconds.
• Zone 3: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 3 for 3
seconds.
• Zone 4: Press and hold h (right cursor) and 4 for 3
seconds.
■ Replacing the battery in the simplified
remote control
Change the battery when the operation range of the
simplified remote control decreases.
• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and –).
• If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the
simplified remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.
• If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful
not to let the leaking battery acid touch your skin or clothing.
• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.
• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.
Simplified remote control
INPUT
MUTE
SYSTEM MEMORY
41 32
POWERSTANDBY
STATUS MENU
ENTER
SUBMENU
RETURN DISPLAY
VOLUME
STANDBY
Sets the selected zone to the
standby mode.
☞ P. 30, 110
SYSTEM MEMORY
Save or recall the system
settings.
☞ P. 91
INPUTl / h
Select the input source.
☞ P. 41
POWER
Turn on the power.
☞ P. 30, 110
VOLUME +/–
Adjust the volume level.
☞ P. 41
MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
☞ P. 43
Remove the insulation sheet before using the remote
control.
These buttons function as
well as the following
identical buttons on the
main remote control (when
the operation selector mode
is set to FAMP).
8STATUS
9k / n / l / h
9ENTER
0RETURN, SUBMENU
IMENU
KDISPLAY
Notes
Use a straight
pin to remove
the cover.
Replace the
battery with a new
CR2025 battery.
Close the cover.
107 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this
unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2), third zone (Zone 3) and fourth zone
(Zone 4). You can control this unit from the second, third or fourth zone using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone, third zone and/or fourth zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the
infrared signal receiver in the second zone, third zone and/or fourth zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the
main zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone, third zone and/or fourth zone.
• A video monitor for the second room.
y
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
■ Using external amplifiers
Connect the external amplifiers in the second zone and third zone to the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2/ZONE 3) jacks with
analog cables and connect the external amplifier in the fourth zone to the OPTICAL (ZONE 4) jack with the optical
digital audio cable.
y
You can also connect the external amplifier (with volume control) in the fourth zone to the analog ZONE 4 OUT jacks with an audio
cable.
Using multi-zone configuration
Connecting the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone 4 components
Only analog signals are sent to the second, third and fourth (analog ZONE 4 OUT) zones. Any source you want to
listen to in these zones must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
y
When this unit is in the party mode (page 112), audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks or DIGITAL INPUT jacks are output at the
ZONE OUT (ZONE 2/ZONE 3) and OPTICAL (ZONE 4) jacks.
DIGITAL OUTPUT
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
OPTICAL
L R L R
O
Optical in
Amplifier
(Zone 2)
Amplifier
(Zone 3)
Amplifier
(with volume control)
(Zone 4)
Audio in Audio in
This unit
108 En
Using multi-zone configuration
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
• Adjust the second zone and/or third zone volume by using the amplifier in each zone when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is set
to “Fixed” (page 86).
■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit
If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals.
If you want to use two internal amplifiers (SP1 and SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals.
■ Connecting zone video monitors
Connect the video monitor(s) in Zone 2, Zone 3 and/or Zone 4 to the ZONE VIDEO and/or COMPONENT VIDEO
(MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) jacks. If you connect the multiple zone video monitors to these jacks, the video monitors
play back the same source simultaneously.
y
To assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) jacks to the main zone or another zone, configure the
“Component Assign” setting (page 85).
Notes
Important safety notice
The speaker terminals of this amplifier should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than
one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your amplifier.
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
+
R
L
SP1
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
+
R
L
SP2
Speakers
(Zone 3)
This unit
Speakers
(Zone 2)
ZONE
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
VV
PRPBY
This unit
Source component
Video In Video In
Video monitor
(Zone 3)
Video monitor
(Zone 2)
Video monitor
(Zone 4)
Component
video in
109 En
Using multi-zone configuration
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks for multi-zone components
This unit is equipped with two REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks. You can use these jacks to control this unit and
other components from Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4. The following diagram shows an example of the connections.
y
Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use
an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.
■ Using TRIGGER OUT jacks for multi-zone components
This unit is equipped with two TRIGGER OUT jacks. You can turn on and off the component corresponding to the
selection of the input source of the desired zone or turning on and off the desired zone by configuring the “Trigger
Output” settings (page 89).
REMOTE
IN 1 2
OUT IN OUT
This unit
Remote control
signal in
Remote control
signal in
DVD player (etc.)
CD player (etc.)
(Zone 2)
(Zone 3)
Infrared signal
receiver
Remote control
Remote control
signal out
Remote control
signal out
Remote
control
External amplifier
OUTOUT
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
OUT
IN
REMOTE
REMOTE
This unit
Yamaha
component
Yamaha
component
Infrared signal
receiver
TRIGGER OUT
1
2
Power amplifier (etc.)
Zone 2 (etc.)
Trigger in
This unit
Trigger in
Projector (etc.) in the
main zone
110 En
Using multi-zone configuration
You can select the zone you want to control by using the
control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
While Zone 4 is turned on, no signal is output at the DVR OUT,
VCR OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks.
■ Basic operation
Front panel operations
1 Press
L
ZONE 2,
L
ZONE 3 or
L
ZONE 4
on the front panel to turn on or off each zone.
2 Press
L
ZONE CONTROLS on the front
panel repeatedly to select the zone you want
to control.
Each time you press
L
ZONE CONTROLS, the
front panel display changes as shown below, and the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for
approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator
flashes when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.
ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.
ZONE4
Controls the Zone 4 amplifier and tuner functions.
y
You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the
selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,
the currently selected zone mode is automatically
canceled.
3 Perform the desired operation in the selected
zone (page 110).
y
To turn off the desired zone, press LZONE2, LZONE3
or LZONE4 again.
Remote control operations
1 Press
H
ZONE repeatedly to select the zone
you want to control.
“MAIN”, “ZONE2”, “ZONE3” or “ZONE4”
indicator appears in the display window (D) on the
remote control.
2 Press EPOWER to turn on the selected
zone.
3 Perform the desired operation in the selected
zone (page 110).
y
To turn off the desired zone, press DSTANDBY.
■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2,
Zone 3 or Zone 4
Rotate the IINPUT selector (or set the
operation mode selector to FAMP and then
press one of the input selector buttons (3)).
• Select “DOCK” as the input source to use the iPod
features (page 57) or Bluetooth features (page 55) in
the selected zone.
• Select “USB/NET” as the input source to use the USB
features (page 60) or network features (page 60) in the
selected zone.
The input sources are shared across all zones.
■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate
M
VOLUME (or press
J
VOLUME +/–).
y
Press
L
MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output
to the selected zone.
After the connections, turn on this unit and set the
speaker terminal assignments with “Zone SP Assign”
(page 85).
Controlling Zone 2, Zone 3 or Zone 4
Note
ZONE2
ZONE3 ZONE4
No indicator flashes
when the main zone is selected.
Note
MAIN
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
ZONE 4
(Zone 2) (Zone 3) (Zone 4)
(Main zone)
111 En
Using multi-zone configuration
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,
J
VOLUME +/– can be used only when “Zone2 Volume” or
“Zone3 Volume” is set to “Variable” (page 86).
• You cannot adjust the volume level of Zone 4 with the controls
on this unit. Use controls on the Zone 4 component to adjust it.
■ Adjusting the front speaker balance of
Zone 2 or Zone 3
Press DTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BALANCE” and then rotate the JPROGRAM
selector for adjustment.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
You cannot adjust the front speaker balance of Zone 4 with the
controls on this unit. Use controls on the Zone 4 component to
adjust it.
Press DTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the
low-frequency response (BASS) and then rotate
the JPROGRAM selector for adjustment.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
■ Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2, Zone
3 or Zone 4
Use this feature to turn of the desired zone after a certain
amount of time.
Set the operation mode to FAMP and then press
CSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time.
The sleep timer setting changes as shown below.
■ Using the zone OSD
You can browse music contents (such as iPod contents) by
using the zone OSD.
1 Set the operation mode selector to FAMP
and then press the desired input selector
button (3).
2 Press KDISPLAY to display the menu
screen on the zone OSD.
3 Use 9k / n / l / h and 9ENTER to
navigate the menu on the zone OSD.
• The menu displayed in the zone OSD appears in English
even if Japanese or Russian is selected.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the
front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those
characters are replaced with underscores “_”.
y
• You can select the zone(s) of which the operational status
is displayed (page 87).
• You can operate the zone OSD in the same way as GUI
operations.
Notes
Note
120min. 90min.
60min.30min.OFF
Notes
112 En
Using multi-zone configuration
Use this feature to play main zone sources in other zones
simultaneously. This feature is useful when you want to
play back main sources as background music in a home
party, etc.
y
You can select the zones covered by the party mode with “Party
Mode Set” (page 86).
1,2,3 ··· In the party mode, this unit distributes the same
sources to the zones which join the party mode.
4 ··· You can also operate the specific zone
separately when this unit is in the party mode.
Set the operation mode selector on the remote
control to FAMP and then press CPAR TY to
turn on or off the party mode.
“PARTY MODE ON” or “PARTY MODE OFF” appears
in the front panel display and GUI screen.
While this unit is in the party mode, the corresponding
zone indicators turn on in the front panel display.
y
Input audio signals are mixed down to monaural and output at
the analog ZONE OUT (ZONE 2/ZONE 3) jacks.
• When this unit is in the party mode, audio signals input at the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks cannot be output.
• When this unit is in the party mode, no signal is output at the
DVR OUT, VCR OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks.
• When this unit is in the party mode, only the analog audio
signals (same type as the signal input at the main zone) can be
output at the analog ZONE 4 OUT jacks.
Using the party mode
Notes
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
AUDIO
SELECT
SPEAKERS
AB
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MULTI
ZONE
STRAIGHT TUNING MODE
ZONE ON/OFF
MENU
TONE CONTROL
ZONE
CONTROLS
REC OUT/
ZONE 2
MEMORY FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
EFFECT DISPLAY
MAN'L/AUTO
CATEGORY
SEARCH MODE
PUSH ENTER
PROGRAM
R
L
OPTICAL
HDMI IN USB
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 3 ZONE 4
ZONE 2
12
3
4
113 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
• Only
B
MASTER ON/OFF,
K
STRAIGHT and the
J
PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
1 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front
panel to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
2 Press and hold
K
STRAIGHT and then
press
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the
J
PROGRAM selector to select
the parameter you want to adjust.
4 Press
K
STRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
5 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to save the new
setting and turn off this unit.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the
front panel of this unit.
We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.
■ Wake on RS-232C access
RS232C STANDBY
Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-
232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.
Advanced setup
Notes
Using the advanced setup menu
Choice Descriptions
8ΩMIN
Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to
8 Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω
or higher.
6ΩMIN
Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to
6 Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω
or higher (front speakers only: 4 Ω or higher).
MASTER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
While holding
down
Choice Descriptions
ON
Select this setting if you want to activate the
signal-receiving capability of the remote control
sensor.
OFF
Select this setting if you want to deactivate the
signal-receiving capability of the remote control
sensor.
Note
Choice Functions
YES
Select this setting to set this unit to transmit data
via the RS-232C interface.
NO
Select this setting to set this unit not to transmit
data via the RS-232C interface.
114 En
Advanced setup
■ Remote control ID setting
REMOTE CON AMP
Use this feature to set the remote control ID of this unit for
remote control recognition.
Setting remote control ID
Use this feature to set the remote control ID. This feature
is useful when you control multiple Yamaha AV receiver
or amplifier with using the remote control.
Press GID repeatedly using a ballpoint pen or
similar object on the remote control to select the
desired remote control ID.
Each time you press GID, the remote control ID indicator
changes as shown below.
y
To set the remote control ID of the simplified remote control,
see page 106 for details.
■ Bi-amplifier mode BI-AMP
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier
function.
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK
terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in
that the terminals are already used for the bi-amplifier
connection (page 19) and the presence speaker output is
disabled.
■ Pre-amplifier mode PREAMP MODE
Use this feature to select whether you use this unit as the
preamplifier in the main zone.
y
This setting does not affect the amplifier assignments for the
other zones (SP1 and SP2).
■ Recovery and backup of the system
settings
RECOV./BACKUP
Use this feature to save and restore the settings of this unit.
• This unit does not save the preset USB/network items, and
system memory settings.
• If no settings are saved, you cannot select “RECOVERY”.
■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE
Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the
initial factory settings. You can select the category of
parameters to be initialized.
y
To initialize the parameters of each sound field program, use
“Initialize” in “Stereo/Surround” (page 72).
■ MAC address filter MAC FILTER
Use this feature to filter the access to this unit via LAN to
control this unit by the MAC address of the accessing PC
(page 95).
y
You can register the MAC address that is allowed to access
when “MAC FILTER” is set to “ON” by using the Web browser
(page 95).
Choice Descriptions
ID1
Select this setting when the ID of the remote
control is set to “ID1”
ID2
Select this setting when the ID of the remote
control is set to “ID2”
Choice Descriptions
ON
Select this setting if you want to activate the bi-
amplifier function.
OFF
Select this setting if you want to deactivate the bi-
amplifier function.
Note
Choice Descriptions
ON
Select this setting when you use this unit as the
preamplifier in the main zone. The audio signals
for the main zone are only output at the PRE OUT
jacks of this unit.
OFF
Select this setting to use the internal amplifiers of
this unit for the main zone.
ID
ID1
ID2
Choice Descriptions
RECOVERY
Restoring the saved setting of this unit.
BACKUP
Saves the current settings of this unit.
CANCEL
Cancels the recovery or backup of the settings of
this unit.
Notes
Choice Descriptions
DSP
PARAM
Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of
the sound field parameters (page 68).
VIDEO
Select this setting to initialize all the parameters in
“Video” and “Display Set” (except “Short
Message” and “Playback Screen”).
NETWORK
Select this setting to initialize all the parameters in
“Network” and MusicCAST information stored in
this unit.
ALL
Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of
this unit.
CANCEL
Select this setting to cancel the initialization
procedure.
Choice Descriptions
ON
Only allows to accept the access from the PC
whose MAC address is registered to this unit.
OFF
Allows to accept the access from any PC.
115 En
Advanced setup
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ TV format TV FORMAT
Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your
television.
Choices: NTSC, PAL
Initial setting:
[General and Korea models]: NTSC
[Other models]: PAL
■ HDMI monitor check MONITOR CHECK
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check
function of this unit.
■ Language LANGUAGE
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that
appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu, OSD
display in the zone monitor and the messages that appear
in the front panel display.
Choices: English (English), (Japanese),
Français (French), Deutsch (German),
Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)
y
You can also select the display language with the GUI menu
(page 90).
··· The selected language is displayed.
— ··· The selected language is not displayed. The menu
items and messages are displayed in English.
■ Firmware update FIRM UPDATE
Use this feature to update the firmware of this unit. For
details on how to update the firmware, refer to information
supplied with updates.
y
To start updating the firmware, rotate the JPROGRAM
selector to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and then press
DMENU.
• Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware.
• Be sure to read information supplied with updates before
performing firmware updates.
■ Firmware version VERSION
Use this feature to check the version of the firmware
currently installed on this unit.
Choice Descriptions
YES
This unit receives the information of the available
video signal resolutions from the video monitor
connected via HDMI and you can only select the
resolutions supported by the video monitor in
“Resolution” (page 82).
SKIP
You can select any resolution in “Resolution”
(page 82).
LANGUAGE GUI menu
Front panel
display
Zone OSD
Русский
(Russian)
—
(Japanese)
——
Other
languages
Choice Descriptions
USB
Updates the firmware of this unit using a USB
memory.
NETWORK
Updates the firmware of this unit via network.
Notes
TROUBLESHOOTING
116 En
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
30
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
17
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, plug it
back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally.
—
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
23-29
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.
Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
42
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” while the input source
component outputs digital audio signals.
Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” or
“COAX/OPT”.
42
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the
I
INPUT
selector (or the input selector buttons (
3
)).
41, 42
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
17
The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume.
—
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
21
117 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
No picture. Your video monitor is connected to one of
the analog video output jacks of this unit
and the picture is input at different types
of video jacks.
Set “Analog ` Analog” to “Conversion” or connect
your source components in the same way as you
connect your video monitor to this unit.
81
1080p-resolution analog video signals are
only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jacks.
Connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR jacks.
23
480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution
video signals cannot be output at the S
VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
Connect your video monitor to the HDMI OUT or
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
—
This unit outputs the video signals not
supported by the video monitor connected
to the HDMI OUT jack.
Select “VIDEO” in “INITIALIZE” to reset the video
parameters.
114
Set “MONITOR CHECK” to “YES”.
115
PURE DIRECT mode is active. Turn off the PURE DIRECT mode.
53
Set “Pure Direct” to “Audio + Video”.
81
Non-standard video signals are input.
Short message
displays do not
appear on the video
monitor.
“Short Message” is set to “Off”. Set “Short Message” to “On”.
88
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
30, 113
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
17
The speaker level settings are incorrect. Adjust “Level” settings.
77
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“Center” in “Configuration” is set to
“None”.
Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”.
75
No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode.
Press
K
STRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT”
mode.
51
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
41
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“Surround” in “Configuration” is set to
“None”.
Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”.
75
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press
K
STRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT”
mode.
51
The surround speakers are connected to
the SURROUND BACK speaker
terminals.
Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND
speaker terminals.
51
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
118 En
Troubleshooting
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“Bass Out” in “Configuration” is set to
“Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Front + SWFR”.
76
“Bass Out” in “Configuration” is set to
“SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Set “Bass Out” to “Front + SWFR”.
76
The source does not contain low-
frequency signals.
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“Surround Back” in “Configuration” is set
to “None”.
Check whether “Surround” is set to “Small” or
“Large” and configure “Surround Back” properly.
75, 76
While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D
mode, no sound is output at the surround
back speakers.
The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format (Desired input
source indicator or
decoder indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up).
The connected component is not set to
output the desired digital audio signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
42
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
26
The volume level is
low while a record is
being played.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
Connect your turntable to this unit through an
MC-head amplifier.
26
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
A source cannot be
recorded by the
recording component.
The audio source connected to the MULTI
CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be
recorded.
A given input source is not output at the
same output channel (e.g. DVR IN to
DVR OUT).
Connect the recording component to another channel
that is not being used for connecting the source
component.
25
While “Zone 4” is set to “ON”, no signal
is output at the analog AUDIO OUT
(DVR, VCR, MD/CD-R) and OPTICAL
(MD/CD-R) jacks.
Set “Zone 4” to “OFF”.
110
You are trying to record a DTS source.
(DTS signal is a digital bitstream.
Attempting to record the DTS bitstream
digitally will result in noise being
recorded.)
Make a setting so that the analog signal will be output
from your DTS-compatible player and then connect
the DTS-compatible player to the AUDIO IN jacks
while the recording component is connected to the
analog AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R)
jacks.
25
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
119 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
An audio source
cannot be recorded by
the digital recording
component connected
to the DIGITAL
OUTPUT jacks.
The audio source component is not
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
Connect the audio source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
25
Some components cannot records Dolby
Digital or DTS sources.
You are trying to record an audio source
input at the DOCK terminal by the digital
recording component connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
Connect the recording component to the analog
AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks.
25
An audio source
cannot be recorded by
the analog recording
component connected
to the analog AUDIO
OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/
CD-R) jacks.
The audio source component is not
connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Connect the audio source component to the AUDIO
IN jacks.
25
Recorded materials
sound differently.
The settings made on this unit (such as
tonal quality, volume level and sound field
programs) do not affect recorded material.
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“Memory Guard” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.
87
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
17
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
120 En
Troubleshooting
■ HDMI
■ Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No picture or sound. The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.
—
HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
32
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
9
The batteries do not last long and get
quickly exhausted.
Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended.
—
Set the backlight mode to “OFF”.
99
The operation mode selector is set
incorrectly.
Set the operation mode selector correctly. When
operating this unit, set it to the
F
AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the
F
SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the
3
TV area, set it to
the
F
TV position.
—
The control zone setting is incorrect. Select the zone you want to control.
110
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using
“List of remote control codes” in “Appendix”
(separate booklet).
99
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” in “Appendix”
(separate booklet).
99
The remote control ID of the remote
control and this unit do not match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and the
remote control.
106, 114
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
101
The remote control
does not learn new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
9
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
101
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
105
121 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ USB and Network
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
“No Device” is
displayed even when
a USB device is
present.
This unit recognized the USB storage
device as an illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
30
The music files and
directories in the USB
device cannot be
viewed.
The music files and directories are placed
in locations other than the FAT area.
Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
—
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
—
The PC server/MCX-
2000/Internet Radio
does not function
properly.
The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration according
to the current operating environment.
84
The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly.
28
The music in the PC
server cannot be
played back.
The PC does not have Windows Media
Player 11 or Windows Media Connect 2.0
installed in it.
Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media
Connect 2.0 in the PC.
—
The music is recorded in a format that
cannot be played on this unit. This unit
cannot play music formats other than
WMA, MP3, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV
(PCM format). Also note that it cannot
play certain music files even if these are
recorded in the WMA, MP3, MPEG-4
AAC, or WAV format.
Play music recorded in a format that this unit is
compatible with.
—
The MusicCAST
server cannot be
connected.
You are attempting to connect to MCX-
1000. The MusicCAST server that can be
connected by this unit is MCX-2000.
Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.
—
Auto Configuration is not executed. Set your Yamaha MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config”
mode.
61
The Internet Radio
cannot be played.
The firewall of the network device is
activated. The Internet Radio can be
played only when it passes through the
port designated by each radio station. The
port number is variable depending on
radio station.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
—
Connection to the Internet is
disconnected.
Check the configuration of the network device, and
then contact the network connection provider.
—
This unit does not
recall the correct item
by using numeric
buttons (1-8).
The connected USB device is incorrect. Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.
28
The directory that stores the selected item
is changed.
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8)
again.
62
This unit does not
recall the selected
item by using numeric
buttons (1-8).
The USB device is not connected
correctly.
Connect the USB device properly.
28
The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the
selected item is turned off.
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
—
The selected Internet Radio station is
temporary unavailable or out of service.
Try again when the selected Internet Radio is
providing the service.
63
Preset other Internet Radio stations.
62
122 En
Troubleshooting
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Please wait
(Starting Server)
This unit is in the middle of waking up
MCX-2000 that has been set to the
standby mode.
Wait for approximately 20 seconds.
—
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your network to this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and the LAN
port on your router or hub.
28
Make sure your router is properly connected and
turned on. Also, make sure your modem is properly
connected and turned on when you are attempting to
listen to Internet Radio.
28
Disconnected
Your USB storage device or USB portable
audio player has been disconnected from
the USB port of this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB storage device or USB portable audio player.
—
The PC server or MCX-2000 previously
connected to this unit no longer exists.
Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX-
2000.
28
No Device
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player to the USB port
of this unit.
28
Try resetting your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Access error
This unit cannot access your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player.
Try another USB storage device or USB portable
audio player.
—
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage
device or USB portable audio player to the USB port
of this unit.
28
Try resetting your USB storage device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your PC.
Make sure Windows Media Player 11 or Windows
Media Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC.
—
Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are
playable (MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV).
—
Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA,
MPEG-4 AAC, and WAV) on your PC.
—
The network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.
Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this
unit to separate it from general network traffic.
—
List updated
The list of the contents stored on your PC
server or MCX-2000 has been updated.
Bookmark ON
The desired Internet Radio station has
been added to the “Bookmarks” list.
Bookmark OFF
The stored Internet Radio station has been
removed from the “Bookmarks” list.
Empty Memory!
No items are assigned to the selected
numeric button.
Assign the desired item to the numeric button.
62
Not found!
This unit cannot find the assigned item for
the selected numeric button.
Connect the USB device that stores the preset item.
—
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
—
Try again when the selected Internet Radio is
providing the service.
63
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again.
62
USB Overloaded
Over current passes through the connected
USB device.
Turn off this unit and then disconnect the USB
device. If the message appears when you connect the
USB device again, this unit may not compatible with
the USB device.
—
123 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ iPod
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the panel display or in the GUI screen, check the connection of
your iPod (page 27).
■ Bluetooth
Note
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
27
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel,
including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini.
—
iPod Connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
iPod Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11,
sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
27
Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Searching... The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
and the Bluetooth component is in the
middle of the pairing.
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
and the Bluetooth component is in the
middle of establishing the connection.
Completed The pairing is completed.
Canceled The pairing is canceled.
BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such
as YBA-10, sold separately) and the
Bluetooth component is established.
BT Disconnected The Bluetooth component is
disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10,
sold separately).
124 En
Troubleshooting
■ Automatic setup
Before automatic setup
During automatic setup
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
34
Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.
—
Select Setup Item! No check items are selected as the
measurement items.
Select the desired check items. 35
Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 87
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 17
E02:No Sur. SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 17
E03:No PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 17
E04:SBR→SBL Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the
SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker
terminal if you only have one surround
back speaker.
17
E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. Perform the automatic setup in a quiet
environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
—
E06:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.
18
E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “automatic setup” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
34
E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting. 34
Check the speaker connections and
placement.
17
The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER
MIC jack may be defective. Contact the
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center.
—
E09:User Cancel The “automatic setup” procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.
Perform the automatic setup again. 34
E10:Internal Err. An internal error occurred. Perform the automatic setup again. 34
125 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
After automatic setup
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run perform the automatic setup again.
• If warning message “W2” or “W3” appears, the adjustments are made, however the adjustment may not be optimal.
• Depending on the speakers, warning message “W1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.
• If error message “E10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
Warning message Cause Remedy
See
page
W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper
polarity (+ or –).
17
W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
W3:Level Error The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
—
Check the speaker connections. 17
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 34
W4:SP Mismatch The result of “Wiring” checked by the
automatic setup is different from the
settings manually configured in
“Configuration”.
Manually configure the speaker settings in
“Configuration”.
75
“Wiring” has not been checked. Manually configure the speaker settings in
“Configuration”.
75
Notes
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
126 En
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “GUI menu” parameters.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position.
1 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF on the front
panel to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
2 Press and hold
K
STRAIGHT and then
press
B
MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the
J
PROGRAM selector to select
“INITIALIZE”.
4 Press
K
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“ALL”.
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
5 Press
B
MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to confirm your
selection and turn off this unit.
Resetting the system
Notes
MASTER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
While holding
down
INITIALIZE
CANCEL
INITIALIZE
ALL
OPERATION MODES OF FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
127 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
If you perform a mode trigger operation using the front panel controls, this unit enters the following mode. In each mode,
you can use the front panel controls as shown below. If no operation is performed for five seconds in each mode, this unit
automatically returns to the default mode.
Available operations in each mode
* In the BT pairing mode, this unit searches for Bluetooth components to be paired. This mode is available only when “DOCK” is
selected as an input source and a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) is connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit.
Operation modes of front panel controls
Mode trigger button Mode to enter
—
Default mode
Press CAUDIO SELECT/REC OUT.
Audio select mode
Press and hold CAUDIO SELECT/REC OUT.
Rec out mode
Press CMENU.
GUI menu mode
Press CTONE CONTROL.
Tone control/speaker level mode
Press and hold DENTER.
BT pairing mode
Press ELEVEL –/+.
Speaker level mode
Mode
CAUDIO
SELECT/REC
OUT
CMENU
CTONE
CONTROL
DENTER ELEVEL –/+
JPROGRAM
selector
Default
to Audio select
mode
to GUI menu
mode
to Tone control/
speaker level
mode
—
to Speaker level
mode
Select a sound
field programs
(page 45)
Audio select
to default mode
to GUI menu
mode
to Tone control/
speaker level
mode
—
to Speaker level
mode
Select an audio
input jack
(page 42)
Rec out
to default mode
to GUI menu
mode
to Tone control/
speaker level
mode
—
to Speaker level
mode
Select a recording
source (page 54)
GUI menu
Left cursor to default mode Right cursor
Confirm the
selection in the
GUI menu
(page 67)
to Speaker level
mode
Menu up/down
Tone control/
speaker level
to Audio select
mode
to GUI menu
mode
Select a parameter
for adjustment
(page 53)
Select a speaker
for level
adjustment
(page 54)
Adjust the speaker
level
Adjust parameters
BT pairing*
—
to GUI menu
mode (the pairing
process continues)
—
to default mode
(the pairing
process continues)
to Speaker level
mode
Select a sound
field program
Note
GLOSSARY
128 En
■ Audio and video synchronization
(lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical
term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining
audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and
transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires
complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an
automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices
to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately
without user interaction.
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.
One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker
while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter
section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a
restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each
amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely
to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass
filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a
cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency.
Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is
separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P
B and PR
signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more
faithfully with this system because each of these signals is
independent. The component signal is also called the “color
difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted
from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is
required in order to output component signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is
composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color,
brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a
video component transmits these three elements combined.
■ Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays,
up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI
specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other
displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and
eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions
and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio
can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front
channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels,
Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an
additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low
Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is
counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the
surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum
volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise
sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-
channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from
5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that
derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording.
For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and
“fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed
for high-definition programming and media including HD
broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory
audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for
Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with
discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps,
Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for
the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby
Digital.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new
technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left
and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right
channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro
Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and
“Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-
channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There
are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,
“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only)
and “Game mode” for game sources.
Glossary
129 En
Glossary
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to
reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and
right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural),
and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The
surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency
range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The
Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume
on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and
directionality.
■ Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard
for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the
studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up
to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel
audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby
Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range
control.
■ DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on
digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD,
signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency
sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and
oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence
with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high
sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that
offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for
multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-
compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz
sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24”
refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion
video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on
DVD video.
■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and
is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the
world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you
can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left
and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1
(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit
incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing
5.1-channel format.
■ DTS Express
DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional
feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality,
low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet
applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio
feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD.
These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the
additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on
demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are
mixed down with the main audio stream on the player
component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to
the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or
analog connections.
■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media
including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional
audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps
for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up
to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD
DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard
for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers
sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a
high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to
18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,
DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of
24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version
1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/
amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains
fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a
set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a
digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-
definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a
single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and
supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video
interface that meets the security requirements of content
providers and system operators. For further information on
HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
130 En
Glossary
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency
range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range
compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels
in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a
high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible
part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the
data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a
similar audio quality to music CD.
■ MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a
bit rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others
for mobile telephones, portable audio players and other low-
capacity devices requiring high sound quality.
In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also
used to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is
supported by computers, media servers and many other devices.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel
playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the
full-range channels with higher separation just like digital
discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio
signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any
compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and
DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the
size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for
“Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses
and then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency,
while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into
a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range
of rates that can be played back is determined based on the
sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound
level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In
principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range
of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number
of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y
signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance
through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images.
■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of
recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It
does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired
compression method can be used with it. By default, it is
compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some
compression methods including the ADPCM method.
■ WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method,
which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of
compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while
maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.
■ “x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a
more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression
of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining
compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color”
expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural
images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer
graphics.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
131 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Elements of a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is
exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field
processor.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your
own home by using the Yamaha original sound field
technology combined with various digital audio systems.
■ CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the
information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate
height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate
and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening
room.
■ SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects
even without any surround speakers by using virtual
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that
does not include a center speaker.
■ Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit
enhances your listening experience by regenerating the
missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency
fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-
frequency bass is compensated, providing improved
performance of the overall sound system.
Sound field program information
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
132 En
This unit employs Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology to optimize the frequency
characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your
listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the
following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor)
to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency
characteristics.
■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.
■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.
■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1
Figure 2
Parametric equalizer information
Gain
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Band 1
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Gain
Frequency
Band 1
Band 2
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Original frequency
characteristic
SPECIFICATIONS
133 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 140 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF) [Asia, General, China, and Korea models]
Front L/R 8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................... 170/205/265/345 W
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 185 W
• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 200 W
• Dynamic Headroom [Asia, General, China, and Korea models]
8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.84 dB
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
Front L/R 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 145 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
Front L/R 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................ 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω
PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω
SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to OUT (REC)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[U.K. and Europe models] ..................................... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R .... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer)
BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 3.5 kHz
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control
BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 450 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 2.0 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back, Presence: Small)
..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper)
[General and Korea models] ....................................... NTSC/PAL
[U.K., Europe, Asia and China models]
................................................................................... PAL/NTSC
• Video Format (Video Conversion)
..........................................................................................NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 or 0.3 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)
.................................................................................... 60 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
• Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back)
[General and Korea models] ............................................... NTSC
[U.K., Europe, Asia and China models] ................................. PAL
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[General and Asia models]
....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption ............................................................... 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less
[Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [General model]
6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W
•AC Outlets
[Asia and General models]..................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[China model]....................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[U.K. model] ...................................... 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum)
[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 196 x 441 mm
(17-1/8 x 7-3/4 x 17-3/8 in)
• Weight ............................................................... 19.6 kg (43 lbs 3 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
134 En
■ Numerics
2ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 50
3D indicator ......................................... 31
5.1-channel speaker connection ........... 18
5.1-channel speaker layout .................. 15
6.1-channel speaker connection ........... 18
6.1-channel speaker layout .................. 15
7.1-channel speaker connection ........... 17
7.1-channel speaker layout .................. 15
7ch Enhancer, sound field program ..... 50
7ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 50
■ A
AC OUTLET(S) .................................. 29
AC power cable connection ................. 29
Action Game, sound field program ...... 48
ADAPTIVE DRC indicator ................. 31
Adaptive DRC, GUI menu ................... 77
Adaptive DSP effect level,
GUI menu ........................................ 77
Adaptive DSP Level, GUI menu ......... 77
Adaptive dynamic range control,
GUI menu ........................................ 77
Adjustment, GUI menu ........................ 82
Advanced automatic setup ................... 37
Advanced setup .................................. 113
Adventure, sound field program .......... 49
AMP, operation mode selector ............ 33
Analog ` Analog, GUI menu ............... 81
Analog ` HDMI, GUI menu ................ 82
Analog Resolution,
input video information ................... 44
Analog-to-analog video conversion,
GUI menu ........................................ 81
Angle, automatic setup ........................ 36
Aspect, GUI menu ............................... 82
Audio and video synchronization,
GUI menu ........................................ 80
Audio input jack selection ................... 42
Audio input jack selection,
GUI menu ........................................ 73
AUDIO jacks ....................................... 20
Audio jacks .......................................... 20
Audio Output, GUI menu .................... 84
AUDIO SELECT ................................. 42
Audio Select, GUI menu ................ 73, 89
Audio signal flow ................................. 22
Audio signals, HDMI ........................... 21
Auto Bypass, GUI menu ...................... 80
AUTO SETUP ..................................... 34
Automatic audio delay adjustment,
GUI menu ........................................ 80
Automatic setup ................................... 34
Automatic setup, troubleshooting ...... 124
■ B
Back ground video, GUI menu ............ 74
Banana plug connection ....................... 19
Bass Out, GUI menu ............................ 76
Bass, GUI menu ................................... 80
BGV, GUI menu .................................. 74
BI-AMP, advanced setup ...................114
Bi-amplification connections ............... 19
Bi-amplifier mode, advanced setup ...114
Bitrate, input audio information ........... 43
Block noise reduction, GUI menu ........83
Block NR, GUI menu ........................... 83
Bluetooth component playback ............55
Bluetooth connection, GUI menu ........74
Bluetooth pairing, GUI menu ...............74
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
connection ........................................27
Bluetooth, troubleshooting .................123
Blu-ray Disc player connection ............25
Brightness, GUI menu ..........................83
■ C
CD player connection ...........................26
CD recorder connection .......................26
Cellar Club, sound field program .........47
Center Image, decoder parameter ........72
CENTER jack ......................................27
Center Level, sound field parameter ....71
CENTER PRE OUT jack .....................26
Center speaker ...................................... 16
Center speaker, GUI menu ...................75
Center Width, decoder parameter ........72
Center, GUI menu ................................75
Chamber, sound field program ............. 47
Channel Mute, GUI menu ....................81
Channel, input audio information ........43
Church in Freiburg,
sound field program .........................47
CINEMA DSP 3D mode ......................51
CINEMA DSP indicator ......................31
CLASSICAL, sound field program .....46
Clearing configurations,
remote control ................................ 105
COAXIAL jacks .................................. 20
Component Assign, GUI menu ............ 85
Component assignment, GUI menu .....85
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..............20
Compressed Music Enhancer mode .....50
Configuration, GUI menu ..............75, 84
Connect, GUI menu .............................74
Connecting AC power cable ................29
Connecting banana plug .......................19
Connecting Bluetooth receiver .............27
Connecting Blu-ray Disc player ........... 25
Connecting CD player ..........................26
Connecting CD recorder ...................... 26
Connecting DVD player .......................25
Connecting DVD recorder ...................25
Connecting HD DVD player ................25
Connecting iPod universal dock ..........27
Connecting MD recorder .....................26
Connecting power cable .......................29
Connecting projector ............................23
Connecting set-top box ........................ 25
Connecting speaker cable ..................... 19
Connecting speakers .............................17
Connecting turntable ............................26
Connecting TV monitor ........................23
Connecting VCR ..................................26
Connecting YBA-10 .............................27
Connecting YDS-11 .............................27
Connecting Zone 2/3/4
components ....................................107
Connections ..........................................14
Contrast, GUI menu .............................83
Control Monitor, GUI menu .................84
Control, GUI menu ...............................80
Controlling iPod ...................................58
Controlling other components,
remote control ..................................97
Controlling TV, remote control ............96
Controlling Zone 2/3/4 .......................110
Cross Over, GUI menu .........................76
■ D
Decoder descriptions ............................52
Decoder indicators ................................31
Decoder Mode, GUI menu .............73, 89
Decoder selection .................................52
Decoder Type,
sound field parameter .......................69
Default Gateway, GUI menu ................85
Detail Enhancement, GUI menu ..........83
Device Over, HDMI error message ......44
DHCP, GUI menu ................................84
Dialogue Lift, sound field parameter ...68
Dialogue, input audio information .......43
DIGITAL INPUT jacks ........................14
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks ....................14
Dimension, decoder parameter .............72
Dimmer, GUI menu ..............................88
Direct, sound field parameter ...............71
Display language setting ......................30
Display Set, GUI menu ........................88
Display window, remote control ..........32
Displaying input source information ....43
Distance, automatic setup .....................35
Distance, GUI menu .............................76
DNS Server (P), GUI menu ..................85
DNS Server (S), GUI menu ..................85
Drama, sound field program .................49
DSP indicators ......................................31
DSP Level, sound field parameter ........68
DVD player connection ........................25
DVD recorder connection ....................25
Dynamic Range, GUI menu .................78
■ E
Edge Enhancement, GUI menu ............83
Effect sound level,
sound field parameter .......................68
ENHANCER indicator .........................31
ENHANCER, sound field program ......50
ENTERTAIN, sound field program .....48
Equalizing, automatic setup .................36
Index
Index
135 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
EXTD Surround, GUI menu ................ 89
External amplifier connection .............. 26
■ F
F.PRNS L Level,
sound field parameter ...................... 71
F.PRNS R Level,
sound field parameter ...................... 71
FIRM UPDATE, advanced setup ...... 115
Flag1/Flag2,
input audio information ................... 43
Format, input audio information .......... 43
Front Input, GUI menu ........................ 74
FRONT L/R jacks ................................ 27
Front left/right speaker ......................... 16
Front panel display message scroll,
GUI menu ........................................ 88
Front panel door ................................... 33
FRONT PRE OUT jacks ...................... 26
Front presence speakers, GUI menu .... 76
Front Presence, GUI menu ................... 76
Front speakers, GUI menu ................... 75
Front, GUI menu .................................. 75
■ G
GUI menu operation ............................ 67
GUI menu tree ..................................... 64
GUI screen position, GUI menu .......... 88
■ H
Hall in Amsterdam,
sound field program ......................... 47
Hall in Munich, sound field program ... 46
Hall in Vienna, sound field program ... 46
HD DVD player connection ................ 25
HDCP Error, HDMI error message ..... 44
HDMI ` HDMI, GUI menu ................. 82
HDMI aspect ratio, GUI menu ............ 82
HDMI automatic lip sync mode,
GUI mode ........................................ 80
HDMI cable plug ................................. 21
HDMI error message ........................... 44
HDMI Error,
input video information ................... 44
HDMI IN jack select, GUI menu ......... 84
HDMI indicator .................................... 31
HDMI information ............................... 21
HDMI jack ........................................... 21
HDMI monitor check,
advanced setup ............................... 115
HDMI OUT jack select, GUI menu ..... 84
HDMI OUT jack selection ................... 42
HDMI Resolution,
input video information ................... 44
HDMI signal ........................................ 21
HDMI signal,
input video information ................... 44
HDMI video signal processing,
GUI menu ........................................ 82
HDMI video signal resolution,
GUI menu ........................................ 82
HDMI, GUI menu ................................ 83
HDMI, troubleshooting ...................... 120
Headphones indicator .......................... 31
Headphones use ....................................43
■ I
I/O Assignment, GUI menu .................87
ID1/ID2 indicator, remote control ........32
INFORMATION ................................132
Information display, remote control .....32
Infrared window, remote control ..........32
Init. Delay, sound field parameter ........69
Initial Set, GUI menu ...........................89
Initial Volume, GUI menu ...................78
INITIALIZE, advanced setup ............114
Initialize, sound field parameter ...........72
Input channel indicators .......................32
Input Channels, GUI menu ..................74
Input Level, GUI menu ........................89
Input Rename, GUI menu ....................88
Input Select, GUI menu ........................73
Input signal indicators ..........................31
Input source indicators .........................31
Input source information display .........43
Input/output assignment, GUI menu ....87
IP Address, GUI menu .........................84
iPod charge on the standby mode,
GUI menu .........................................89
iPod menu tree ......................................57
iPod playback .......................................57
iPod universal dock connection ...........27
iPod, GUI menu ...................................89
iPod, troubleshooting .........................123
■ L
LANGUAGE, advanced setup ...........115
Language, advanced setup .................115
Language, GUI menu ...........................90
Level, automatic setup .........................36
Level, GUI menu ..................................77
Level, music enhancer parameter .........72
LFE Level, GUI menu ..........................78
Lipsync, GUI menu ..............................80
LIVE/CLUB, sound field program ......47
Liveness, sound field parameter ...........70
Loading the system settings .................92
Low-frequency effect level,
GUI menu .........................................78
■ M
MAC address filter, advanced setup ..114
MAC Address, GUI menu ....................85
MAC FILTER, advanced setup ..........114
Macro programming,
remote control ................................103
Manual audio delay adjustment,
GUI menu .........................................81
Manual Test, GUI menu .......................90
Max Volume, GUI menu ......................77
MCX-2000 content playback ...............61
MD recorder connection ......................26
Media Access Control) address,
GUI menu .........................................85
Menu browsing indicator .....................31
Menu tree, iPod ....................................57
Menu tree, network ..............................59
Menu tree, USB ....................................59
MONITOR CHECK,
advanced setup .............................. 115
Monitor Info., GUI menu .................... 84
Monitor information, GUI menu ......... 84
Mono Movie, sound field program ...... 49
Mosquito noise reduction,
GUI menu ........................................ 83
Mosquito NR, GUI menu .................... 83
MOVIE, sound field program .............. 49
Multi CH Assign, GUI menu ............... 74
MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 14
Multi channel assignment,
GUI menu ........................................ 74
Multi Measure, automatic setup .......... 35
Multi Zone, GUI menu ........................ 85
Multi-channel input component
selection ........................................... 42
Multi-channel sources with
headphones ...................................... 50
Multiple point measurement,
automatic setup ................................ 35
Multi-zone configuration ................... 107
Music Content menu ............................ 56
Music Content, GUI menu .................. 75
Music Video, sound field program ...... 48
Muting audio output ............................ 43
Muting Type, GUI menu ..................... 78
■ N
Neo:6 Cinema, decoder ....................... 52
Neo:6 Music, decoder .......................... 52
Network connection ............................. 28
Network content playback ................... 59
Network Standby, GUI menu .............. 85
Network, GUI menu ............................ 84
Network, troubleshooting .................. 121
■ O
Operation mode selector,
remote control ................................. 33
OPTICAL jacks ................................... 20
Optimizing speaker setting .................. 34
Option, GUI menu ............................... 87
Out Of Resolution,
HDMI error message ....................... 44
■ P
Pairing with Bluetooth component ...... 55
Pairing, GUI menu ............................... 74
Panorama, decoder parameter ............. 72
Parameter initialization,
advanced setup .............................. 114
Parametric EQ, GUI menu .................. 79
Parametric equalizer data copy,
GUI menu ........................................ 79
Parametric equalizer information ...... 132
Parametric equalizer type select,
GUI menu ........................................ 79
Parametric equalizer, GUI menu ......... 79
Party mode ......................................... 112
Party Mode Set, GUI menu ................. 86
Party mode settings, GUI menu ........... 86
PC server content playback ................. 61
PEQ Data Copy, GUI menu ................ 79
Index
136 En
PEQ Select, GUI menu ........................ 79
PHONES jack ...................................... 43
Placing speakers ................................... 15
Play information screen,
iPod playback .................................. 58
Play information screen,
USB content ..................................... 60
Playback screen display time,
GUI menu ........................................ 88
Playback Screen, GUI menu ................ 88
Playback style, iPod ............................. 58
Playback, Bluetooth component .......... 55
PLII Game, decoder ............................. 52
PLII Movie, decoder ............................ 52
PLII Music, decoder ............................ 52
PLIIx Game, decoder ........................... 52
PLIIx Movie, decoder .......................... 52
PLIIx Music, decoder .......................... 52
Position, GUI menu ............................. 88
Power cable connection ....................... 29
PRE AMP indicator ............................. 31
PRE OUT jacks .................................... 14
Presence left/right speaker ................... 16
Presence speaker indicators ................. 32
PRESET indicator ................................ 31
Primary DNS server, GUI menu .......... 85
Pro Logic, decoder ............................... 52
Processing, GUI menu ......................... 82
Prog. Re-Processing, GUI menu .......... 82
Programming other remote controls .. 101
Progressive re-processing,
GUI menu ........................................ 82
Projector connection ............................ 23
PURE DIRECT mode .......................... 53
Pure Direct, GUI menu ........................ 81
Pure hi-fi sound listening ..................... 53
■ R
Rear panel ............................................ 14
Recital/Opera, sound field program ..... 48
RECOV./BACKUP,
advanced setup ............................... 114
Recovery and backup of the system
settings,
advanced setup ............................... 114
Reloading automatic setup
parameter ......................................... 39
REMOTE CON AMP,
advanced setup ............................... 114
Remote control ..................................... 96
Remote control code setting ................ 99
Remote control customization ............. 98
Remote control ID setting,
advanced setup ............................... 114
Remote control using ........................... 32
Remote control, installing batteries ....... 9
Remote control, troubleshooting ........ 120
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ..................... 27
REMOTE SENSOR,
advanced setup ............................... 113
Remote sensor, advanced setup ......... 113
Repeat, iPod playback style ................. 58
Resetting system ................................ 126
Resolution, GUI menu ......................... 82
Rev. Delay, sound field parameter .......71
Rev. Level, sound field parameter .......71
Rev. Time, sound field parameter ........ 70
Reviewing automatic setup
parameter .........................................39
Roleplaying Game,
sound field program .........................48
Room Size, sound field parameter .......69
RS-232C STANDBY,
advanced setup ............................... 113
■ S
S VIDEO jacks ..................................... 20
Sampling, input audio information ......43
Saturation, GUI menu .......................... 83
Saving system settings .........................91
SB. Init. Delay,
sound field parameter ....................... 69
SB. Liveness, sound field parameter ....70
SB. Room Size,
sound field parameter ....................... 69
Sci-Fi, sound field program ................. 49
Scroll, GUI menu .................................88
Secondary DNS server, GUI menu ......85
Selecting audio input jacks .................. 42
Selecting decoder .................................52
Selecting multi-channel input
component ........................................42
Selecting sound field programs ............45
Setting remote control ID,
remote control ID setting ............... 114
Set-top box connection .........................25
Setup, GUI menu ..................................75
Short Message, GUI menu ................... 88
Shortcut button,
Network content playback ...............62
Shortcut button,
USB content playback .....................62
Shuffle, iPod playback style .................58
Signal flow ...........................................22
SIGNAL INFO ..................................... 43
SILENT CINEMA ...............................50
SILENT CINEMA indicator ................31
Simple Remote Mode,
iPod playback ...................................58
Simplified remote control ..................106
Size, automatic setup ............................ 35
SLEEP indicator ................................... 31
Sleep timer ...........................................44
Sound field parameter .......................... 69
Sound field program .............................45
Sound field program information .......131
Sound field program selection .............45
Sound field programs with
headphones .......................................50
Sound field programs without surround
speakers ............................................50
Sound, GUI menu ................................78
Source name change ...........................102
SOURCE, operation mode selector .....33
Speaker angle, automatic setup ............36
Speaker cable connection .....................19
Speaker configurations, GUI menu ......75
Speaker connection ..............................17
Speaker distance, automatic setup ........35
Speaker distance, GUI menu ................76
Speaker equalizing, automatic setup ....36
SPEAKER IMP., advanced setup .......113
Speaker impedance setting ...................30
Speaker impedance,
advanced setup ...............................113
Speaker level adjustment ......................54
Speaker level, automatic setup .............36
Speaker level, GUI menu .....................77
Speaker placement ................................15
Speaker setting optimization ................34
Speaker size, automatic setup ...............35
Speaker terminals .................................14
Speaker wiring, automatic setup ..........35
Speaker, GUI menu ..............................75
Specifications .....................................133
Spectacle, sound field program ............49
Sports, sound field program .................48
Standard, sound field program .............49
Standby Charge, GUI menu .................89
Standby mode .......................................30
Standby through control, GUI menu ....83
Standby Through, GUI menu ...............83
Status, GUI menu .................................85
Stereo playback ....................................50
STEREO, sound field program ............50
Stereo/Surround, GUI menu .................68
Straight Enhancer,
sound field program .........................50
STRAIGHT mode ................................51
Subnet Mask, GUI menu ......................85
Subwoofer ............................................16
SUBWOOFER jack ..............................27
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ............27
Subwoofer, GUI menu .........................76
Supplied accessories ...............................7
SUR. DECODE,
sound field program .........................50
Sur. Init.Delay,
sound field parameter .......................69
Sur. Liveness, sound field parameter ...70
Sur. Room Size,
sound field parameter .......................69
Sur.Back L Level,
sound field parameter .......................71
Sur.Back R Level,
sound field parameter .......................71
SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks ..................................................27
Surround back left/right speaker ..........16
Surround back left/right speakers,
GUI menu .........................................76
Surround back speaker .........................16
Surround Back, GUI menu ...................76
Surround Decode,
sound field program .........................50
Surround decoder mode ........................50
Surround L Level,
sound field parameter .......................71
SURROUND L/R jacks ........................27
Surround left/right speaker ...................16
Surround left/right speakers,
GUI menu .........................................75
Index
137 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ............. 26
Surround R Level,
sound field parameter ...................... 71
Surround, GUI menu ............................ 75
System ID, GUI menu ......................... 85
System Memory ................................... 91
System reset ....................................... 126
System settings .................................... 91
System, GUI menu ............................... 85
■ T
Target Zone, GUI menu ....................... 89
The Bottom Line,
sound field program ......................... 47
The Roxy Theatre,
sound field program ......................... 47
Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 53
Tone Control, GUI menu ..................... 80
Transmit indicator, remote control ...... 32
Treble, GUI menu ................................ 80
Trigger Mode, GUI menu .................... 89
Trigger Output, GUI menu .................. 89
Troubleshooting ................................. 116
Turning off ........................................... 30
Turning on ............................................ 30
Turntable connection ........................... 26
TV FORMAT, advanced setup .......... 115
TV format, advanced setup ................ 115
TV monitor connection ........................ 23
TV, operation mode selector ................ 33
■ U
Unit, GUI menu ................................... 76
Unprocessed input source listening ..... 51
USB content playback ......................... 59
USB device that can be used ................ 61
USB port select, GUI menu ................. 75
USB Select, GUI menu ........................ 75
USB storage device connection ........... 28
USB, troubleshooting ......................... 121
■ V
VCR connection ................................... 26
VERSION, advanced setup ................ 115
Vertical dialogue position,
sound field parameter ...................... 68
Video Adjustment, GUI menu ............. 74
VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 29
Video conversion for analog-to-analog,
GUI menu ........................................ 81
VIDEO jacks ........................................ 20
Video jacks .......................................... 20
Video quality adjustment ..................... 82
Video signal flow ................................. 22
Video signal, HDMI ............................ 21
Video, GUI menu ................................. 81
Village Vanguard,
sound field program ......................... 47
Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................... 50
VIRTUAL indicator ............................. 31
VOLTAGE SELECTOR ....................... 9
VOLUME level indicator .................... 32
Volume Trim, GUI menu ..................... 73
Volume, GUI menu .............................. 77
■ W
Wake on RS-232C access,
advanced setup ...............................113
Wall Paper, GUI menu .........................88
Warehouse Loft,
sound field program .........................47
Web browser controlling ......................95
Web Control Center .............................95
Wiring, automatic setup .......................35
■ Y
YBA-10 connection .............................27
YDS-11 connection ..............................27
YPAO ...................................................34
YPAO indicator ....................................31
■ Z
Zone 2/3/4 component connection .....107
Zone 2/3/4 control ..............................110
Zone indicators, remote control ...........32
Zone on-screen display, GUI menu .....87
Zone OSD, GUI menu ..........................87
ZONE OUT jacks .................................14
Zone SP Assign, GUI menu .................85
Zone speaker assignment,
GUI menu .........................................85
Zone2 Balance, GUI menu ...................86
Zone2 Initial Vol., GUI menu ..............86
Zone2 Max Vol., GUI menu ................86
Zone2 Mono, GUI menu ......................86
Zone2 Muting Type, GUI menu ...........87
Zone2 Rename, GUI menu ..................87
Zone2 Set, GUI menu ..........................86
Zone2 Tone Control, GUI menu ..........86
Zone2 Volume, GUI menu ...................86
ZONE2/ZONE3/ZONE4 indicators .....32
Zone3 Balance, GUI menu ...................86
Zone3 Initial Vol., GUI menu ..............86
Zone3 Max Vol., GUI menu ................86
Zone3 Mono, GUI menu ......................86
Zone3 Muting Type, GUI menu ...........87
Zone3 Set, GUI menu ..........................86
Zone3 Tone Control, GUI menu ..........86
Zone3 Volume, GUI menu ...................86
Zone4 Set, GUI menu ..........................86
“
B
MASTER ON/OFF” or
“
3
DVD” (example) indicates the
name of the parts on the front panel
or the remote control. Refer to the
attached sheet or “Appendix”
(separate booklet) for the
information about each position of
the parts.
© 2008 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WQ21600
En
AV Amplifier
OWNER’S MANUAL
English
RBGLE
DSP-Z7_RBGLE_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, September 17, 2008 4:00 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
AV Amplifier
Amplificateur Audio-Vidéo
APPENDIX
APPENDICE
ANHANG
TILLÄGG
APPENDICE
APÉNDICE
AANHANGSEL
ПРИЛОЖЕНИЕ
RTKBGLE
2
■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Pannello anteriore/Panel delantero/
Voorpaneel/Фронтальная панель/ 前部面板 / 전변 패널
LEVEL
MULTI ZONE
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT
PROGRAM
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MENU ENTER
NEXT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
1
ZONE 2
2
SYSTEM MEMORY
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
3
ZONE 4
4
INFO
ZONE CONTROLS
TONE
CONTROL
LEVEL
MULTI ZONE
MIC
OPTIMIZER
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT
PROGRAM
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MENU ENTER
NEXT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
1
ZONE 2
2
SYSTEM MEMORY
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
3
ZONE 4
4
INFO
ZONE CONTROLS
TONE
CONTROL
BHA
MI
LJK
GEDC
F
3
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/Telecomando/
Mando a distancia/Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ/ 遥控器 / 리모콘
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-AUX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DVR VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
MEMORY
SUBMENU
RETURN
PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
MUTE
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
3D DSP
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
CLASSICAL
1
LIVE/CLUB
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
STEREO
5
ENHANCER
6
SUR.DECODE
7
STRAIGHT
8
PURE DIRECT
ENT
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
SLEEP
TV
PARTY
MUTE
INPUT
9 0
HDMI OUT
LEVEL
TV CH
INFO
TV VOL
EXTD SUR.
10
REC
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
CLASSICAL
1
LIVE/CLUB
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
STEREO
5
ENHANCER
6
HDMI OUT
0
SUR.DECODE
7
STRAIGHT
8
1
M
N
O
P
2
3
4
8
5
6
9
0
A
B
C
SR t
Q
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
7
4
Sound output in each sound field program
Son émis dans chaque correction de champ sonore
Klangausgabe in jedem soundfeldprogramm
Ljudutmatning för varje ljudfältsprogram
Suono emesso da ciascun programma di campo sonoro
Salida de sonido en cada programa de campo sonoro
Geluidsweergave in elk van de geluidsveldprogramma’s
ВоспРоизведение звуЧаниЯ длЯ каждой пРогРаммы звукового полЯ
各声场程序的声音输出
각 음장 프로그램의 사운드 출력
*1 / / / : OFF
*2 / / / : ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input.
Front left speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker
Center speaker Surround right speaker Presence left speaker
Front right speaker Surround back left speaker Presence right speaker
Speaker from which sound is being output
Speaker from which no sound is being output
L
SL
SBR
C SR PL
R
SBL
PR
Speaker settings
7-channel 5-channel
1
2
3
4
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
C
R
SL SR
Speaker settings
7-channel 5-channel
5
6
7
8
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
C
R
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
C
R
SL SR
EX
PL x
neural
EX
PL x
neural
5
Program 3D
Input audio source
2-channel
(monaural)
2-channel (stereo)
5.1-channel*
1
6.1/7.1-channel*
2
CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
Hall in Vienna
Hall in Amsterdam
Church in Freiburg
Chamber
LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard
Warehouse Loft
Cellar Club
The Roxy Theatre
The Bottom Line
ON
1122
OFF
1124
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Action Game
Roleplaying Game
Music Video
Recital/Opera
MOVIE
Standard
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
Drama
ON
2222
OFF
7424
MOVIE
Mono Movie
ON
2222
OFF
3224
STEREO
2ch Stereo
––
5555
STEREO
7ch Stereo
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
––
4444
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(Pro Logic)
(PLII Movie)
(PLII Game)
––
6774
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLII Music)
––
8774
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLIIx Movie)
(PLIIx Game)
(Neo:6 Cinema)
––
6474
SUR.DECODE
Surround Decoder
(PLIIx Music)
(Neo:6 Music)
––
8474
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
MUSIC ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer
––
5574
6
List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Lista dei codici di telecomando
Lista de códigos de mando a distancia
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
Список кодов дистанционного управления
遥控器代码列表
리모콘 코드 목록
TV
ACURA 00101
ADDISON 01201, 01601,
08401
ADMIRAL 01301, 02201,
05801
ADVENT 09601
AGB 06801
AIKO 01201
AKAI 00101, 00301,
02901, 04601,
06801, 08901,
10501
AKURA 03701
ALBA 00101, 00401,
04801, 08501
AMERICA ACTION
02701
AMPRO 09401
AMSTRAD 00101, 00401,
02501, 04801,
05101, 05301,
06801
ANAM 00101, 02701,
03401
ANAM NATIONAL
03401, 08301
ANITECH 00101
AOC 00101, 00301,
00901, 01201,
01301, 01601,
02601, 02701,
05601
APEX DIGITAL09301, 09701,
09901
ASA 01401
AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701
AWA 00101
BANG & OLUFSEN
07201
BASIC 00101
BAUR 00401, 04601,
06701
BAYSONIC 02701
BEAUMARK 02601
BEKO 04701, 06201,
09001, 09101
BELL & HOWELL
02001
BEON 00401
BLAUPUNKT 02801
BLUE SKY 08501, 11401
BONDSTEC 03301
BRADFORD 02701
BRANDT 01701, 04201
BROKSONIC 03101, 05801
BUSH 00101, 00101,
00401, 04801,
04901, 08501,
11401
BYDESIGN 14301, 14401,
14501, 14601
CANDLE 00301
CARNIVALE 00301
CARVER 00801, 02401
CASCADE 00101
CATHAY 00401
CCE 00401
CELEBRITY 00001
CELERA 09701
CENTURION 00401
CGE 03301
CHANGHONG 09701
CHING TAI 00101, 01201
CHUN YUN 00001, 00101,
01201, 02701
CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601,
02701
CIMLINE 00101
CINERAL 01201, 05601
CITIZEN 00301, 00901,
01201
CLARION 02701
CLARIVOX 00401
CLATRONIC 03301, 04701
CONDOR 04101, 04701
CONRAC 10301
CONTEC 00101, 02701
CRAIG 02701
CROSLEY 00801
CROWN 00101, 00401,
02701, 04701,
05201
CTC 03301
CURTIS MATHES
00301, 00501,
00801, 00901,
01301, 01801,
02001, 02301,
05601, 08901,
11801, 12201
CXC 02701
DAEWOO 00101, 00301,
00401, 01201,
01601, 02001,
02401, 02601,
02701, 04901,
05601, 07901,
08201, 13101
DANSAI 00401
DAYTON 00101
DE GRAAF 02901, 06901
DECCA 00401, 06801
DENON 01801
DIGATRON 00401
DIXI 00101, 00401
DUMONT 00201
DWIN 09201, 10101
ECE 00401
ELBE 03501
ELECTROBAND
00001
ELIN 00401, 06901
ELITE 04101
ELTA 00101
EMERSON 02001, 02601,
02701, 03101,
04601, 05801,
07901
ENVISION 00301, 10601
EPSON 11001
ERRES 00401
ETHER 00101, 00301
ETRON 00101
EUROPHON 06801
FERGUSON 00401, 01001,
01701, 03201,
03801, 04201,
07101
FIDELITY 04601
FINLANDIA 02901, 04401
FINLUX 00401, 01401,
01501, 04401,
06801
FIRSTAR 00101, 03101
FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301,
08501
FISHER 01401, 02001,
02901, 04701
FLINT 05701
FORMENTI 00401, 04101
FORTRESS 01301
FRONTECH 02201, 03301,
03701
FUJITSU 08701, 10401
FUNAI 02501, 02701,
03701
FUTURETECH 02701
GATEWAY 13301, 13401
GE 00301, 00501,
00601, 01201,
02601, 02701,
05601, 07101,
11801, 12201,
12601
GEC 00401, 06801
GELOSO 00101
GENEXXA 02201
GIBRALTER 00201, 00301
GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401,
01701, 02001,
02601, 05001
GOODMANS 00401, 04801,
04901, 08201
GOREMJE 04701
GRADIENTE 00701, 02401
GRAETZ 02201, 04601
GRANADA 00401, 02901,
04301, 06801
GRANDIN 07701
GRUNDIG 00401, 02801,
06301, 07001,
07401
GRUNPY 02701
HALLMARK 02601
HANKOOK 00301, 02601,
02701
HANSEATIC 00401, 04101,
04601, 05201,
07001
HANTAREX 06801
HARMAN/KARDON
00801
HARVARD 02701
HAVERMY 01301
HCM 00101, 05101
HELLO KITTY 05601
HINARI 00101, 00401
HISAWA 05701
HITACHI 00101, 00301,
01201, 01501,
01701, 01801,
02201, 02601,
03001, 04501,
06101, 06901,
07301, 11701,
12101
HUA TUN 00101
HUANYU 04901
HYPSON 00401, 03701
ICE 03701, 04801
IMPERIAL 03301, 04701,
05201
INDIANA 00401
INFINITY 00801
INGELEN 02201
INNO HIT 06801
INNOVA 00401
INTEQ 00201
INTERFUNK 00401, 02201,
03301, 04601,
06701
INTERVISION 00401, 03701,
05001
ITS 04801
ITT 02201, 04601,
06901
JBL 00801
JCB 00001
JEAN 00101, 00601,
01201, 02101,
03101
JENSEN 09601
JVC 00701, 04801,
05801, 08401,
08701
KAISUI 00101
KAPSCH 02201
KARCHER 07701
KATHREIN 07001
KEC 02701
KENDO 00401
KENWOOD 00301
7
KNEISSEL 03501, 05401
KOLIN 00701, 01601,
02701
KORPEL 00401
KOYODA 00101
KTV 00301, 02701
L&S ELECTRONIC
10301
LEYCO 00401, 03701
LG 00301, 00401,
00901, 01601,
02601, 09001
LIESENK & TTER
00401
LOEWE 06701
LUXOR 04501, 04601
LXI 00501, 00801,
02001, 02101,
02601
M ELECTRONIC
00101, 00401,
01401, 01501,
01701, 02201,
03801, 04401,
04901, 06001
MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801
MAGNAFON 06801
MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801,
12001, 12601
MANESTH 03701, 04101
MARANTZ 00301, 00401,
00801, 07001
MARK 00401
MATSUI 00101, 00401,
02901, 04801,
06301, 06801
MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301
MEDIATOR 00401
MEDION 08501, 10301,
11401
MEGATRON 01801, 02601
MEMOREX 00101, 01901,
02001, 02601,
03401, 05801,
11401
METZ 05501
MGA 00301, 01901,
02601
MICROMAXX 10301
MICROSTAR 10301
MIDLAND 00201, 00501,
00601
MINERVA 06301
MINOKA 05101
MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301,
01601, 01901,
02001, 02601,
02701, 03101,
03401, 06701,
11201, 11901
MIVAR 03901, 04001,
06801, 07601
MOTOROLA 01301
MTC 00301, 00901,
06701
MULTITECH 00101, 02701
MYRYAD 07001
NAD 02101, 02601,
04601, 11301
NEC 00101, 00301,
00601, 02001,
02101, 02401,
02601, 05701,
06501, 13201
NECKERMANN
00401, 07001
NEI 00401
NETSAT 00401
NEWAVE 00101, 01201,
01301, 02601
NIKKAI 00401, 03701
NIKKO 00301, 01201,
02601
NOKIA 04601, 05901,
06001, 06901,
08101
NORCENT 09301, 10801
NORDMENDE 01701, 03801,
07101
NTC 01201
OCEANIC 02201, 04601
ONWA 02701, 05301
OPTIMUS 02001, 02301,
03401, 08301
OPTONICA 01301
ORION 00401, 03101,
04101, 05801,
06801
OSAKI 03701, 05101
OTTO VERSAND
00401, 04101,
06701, 07001
PALLADIUM 04701, 05201
PANAMA 03701
PANASONIC 00401, 00601,
00801, 02201,
03401, 08301,
12401
PATHE CINEMA
03201, 04101
PAUSA 00101
PENNEY 00301, 00501,
00601, 00901,
02101, 02601,
12201
PERDIO 04101
PHILCO 00301, 00401,
00801, 01801,
02601, 02701,
03301, 05801,
13101
PHILIPS 00001, 00301,
00401, 00601,
00801, 01201,
01601, 02601,
04901, 07001,
08801, 12601
PHONOLA 00401
PILOT 00301
PIONEER 01701, 02201,
02301, 03801,
08601, 09501,
11301
PORTLAND 01201
PRANDONI-PRINCE
06801
PRIMA 09601
PRISM 00601
PROFEX 00101, 04601
PROSCAN 00501
PROTECH 00101, 00401,
03301, 03701,
05201, 08501
PROTON 00101, 00301,
02601
PULSAR 00201
QUASAR 00601, 03401,
08301
QUELLE 00401, 01401,
04601, 06701
RADIOLA 00401
RADIOMARELLI
06801
RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501,
02001, 02601,
02701
RCA 00001, 00301,
00501, 01101,
01201, 02601,
08601, 11501,
11801, 13901,
12201, 12501,
12601, 12801
REALISTIC 00301, 02001,
02601, 02701
REDIFFUSION 04601
REOC 09001
REVOX 00401
REX 02201, 03501,
03701
RFT 05201
R-LINE 00401
ROADSTAR 00101, 03701,
05201
RUNCO 00201, 00301,
06501, 07501
SABA 01701, 02201,
03801, 04201
SACCS 03201
SAGEM 07701
SAISHO 00101, 03701,
06801
SALORA 02201, 04601,
06901
SAMBERS 06801
SAMPO 00101, 00301,
01201, 01301,
02001, 02501,
02601, 08301,
13301
SAMSUNG 00101, 00301,
00401, 00901,
01101, 01201,
02001, 02601,
03701, 04701,
07001, 07401,
07801, 08901,
09801, 10501,
10701
SANSEI 05601
SANSUI 05801
SANYO 01401, 02001,
02701, 02901,
04301, 10201
SBR 00401
SCHAUB LORENZ
04601
SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301,
04801, 08501
SCOTCH 02601
SCOTT 02601, 02701,
03101
SEARS 00501, 00801,
02001, 02101,
02501, 02601
SEG 03701, 08501
SEI 06801
SELECO 02201, 03501
SEMIVOX 02701
SEMP 02101
SHARP 00301, 01301,
08301
SHEN YING 00101, 01201
SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301,
03101
SIAREM 06801
SIEMENS 00401, 02801
SINUDYNE 06801
SKANTIC 04501
SKY 00401
SKYGIANT 02701
SKYWORTH 00401
SOLAVOX 02201
SONITRON 02901
SONOKO 00101, 00401
SONOLOR 02201, 02901
SONTEC 00401
SONY 00001, 08301,
11101, 11601,
12701, 12901
SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701
SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201
SOWA 00601, 00901,
01201, 02101,
02601
SQUAREVIEW 02501
SSS 02701
STANDARD 00101
STARLITE 02701
STERN 02201, 03501
SUPREME 00001
SYLVANIA 00301, 00801,
02501
SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701
SYNCO 00001, 00901,
01201, 01301,
02601, 05601
SYSLINE 00401
T + A 05501
TACICO 00101, 01201,
02601
TAI YI 00101
TANDY 01301, 02201
TASHIKO 01201, 08301
TATUNG 00101, 00401,
00601, 00801,
00901, 02001,
02101, 06801
TCM 10301
TEAC 00101, 00401,
03701, 05101,
05201, 05701,
08501, 11401
TEC 03301
TECHNEMA 04101
TECHNICS 00601, 03401,
08301
TECHWOOD 00601
TECO 00101, 00601,
01201, 01301,
02601, 03701,
08401
TEKNIKA 00801, 00901,
01201, 01901,
02701
TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601,
04201, 08001,
08901
TELEMEISTER04101
TELETECH 00101
TENSAI 04101
TERA 00301
THOMSON 01701, 03801,
07101, 08001,
12501
THORN 00401, 01401,
04601, 06701
TMK 02601
TNCI 00201
TOSHIBA 00901, 02001,
02101, 06601,
07801, 08301,
10901, 12101,
12301, 13001,
13201
TRIUMPH 06801
TUNTEX 00101, 00301,
01201
TVS 05801
UHER 04101
UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401,
01501, 03701,
04401, 04701,
06401
VECTOR RESEARCH
00301
VESTEL 00401
VICTOR 00701, 03401,
08301, 08401
VIDEOSAT 03301
8
VIDIKRON 00801
VIDTECH 02601
VIEWSONIC 13301
VISION 04101
VOXSON 02201
WALTHAM 04501
WARDS 00301, 00801,
02601, 11301
WATSON 00401, 04101
WAYCON 02101
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
00401, 04101,
05801, 07901
YAMAHA 00301, 01801,
08301, 10001,
11001, 13501,
13601, 13701,
13801, 14001,
14101, 14201
YAPSHE 03401
YOKO 00401, 03701
ZENITH 00201, 01201,
02601, 05801
VCR
ADMIRAL 01102
ADVENTURA 00002
AIKO 02102
AIWA 00002, 00402,
02202, 02602,
02702
AKAI 00602, 02302
AKIBA 01402
ALBA 01402, 02102,
02302, 02702
AMERICA ACTION
02102
AMERICAN HIGH
00302
AMSTRAD 00002
ANAM 00402, 01902,
02002, 02102,
02902
ANAM NATIONAL
01902, 04502
ANITECH 01402
ASA 00402, 01502
ASHA 02002
ASUKA 00402
AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102
BAIRD 00002, 00602,
01602
BASIC LINE 01402, 02102
BEAUMARK 02002
BELL & HOWELL
01602
BLAUPUNKT 01902
BRANDT 02402
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
00602
BROKSONIC 01702, 02602,
04402
BUSH 01402, 02102,
02702
CALIX 00402
CANON 00302
CARVER 01502
CCE 01402, 02102
CGE 00002
CIMLINE 01402
CINERAL 02102
CITIZEN 00402, 02102,
04302
COLT 01402
COMBITECH 02702
CRAIG 00402, 01002,
01402, 02002
CROWN 01402, 02102
CURTIS MATHES
00302, 00602,
01202, 03702
CYBERNEX 02002
CYRUS 01502
DAEWOO 00902, 01602,
02102, 03402,
04302
DANSAI 01402
DE GRAAF 00702
DECCA 00002, 01502
DENON 00702
DUAL 00602
DUMONT 00002, 01502,
01602
DYNATECH 00002
ELCATECH 01402
ELECTROHOME
00402
ELECTROPHONIC
00402
EMEREX 00102
EMERSON 00002, 00302,
00402, 00802,
00902, 01702,
02002, 02102,
04302, 04402
ESC 02002, 02102
FERGUSON 00602, 02402
FIDELITY 00002
FINLANDIA 01502, 01602
FINLUX 00002, 00702,
01502, 01602
FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802,
00902, 01402
FISHER 01002, 01602
FUJI 00202, 00302
FUJITSU 00002, 00902
FUNAI 00002
GARRARD 00002
GE 00302, 01202,
02002, 03502,
03702, 03802
GEC 01502
GENERAL 00902
GO VIDEO 02802
GOLDHAND 01402
GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802,
02902, 04202
GOODMANS 00002, 00402,
01402, 02102
GRADIENTE 00002
GRAETZ 00602, 01602,
02002
GRANADA 01502, 01602
GRANDIN 00002, 00402,
01402
GRUNDIG 01402, 01502,
01902, 02502
HANSEATIC 00402
HARLEY DAVIDSON
00002
HARMAN/KARDON
01502
HARWOOD 01402
HCM 01402
HINARI 01402, 02002,
02702
HI-Q 01002
HITACHI 00002, 00402,
00602, 00702,
02002
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
00702
HYPSON 01402
IMPERIAL 00002
INTERFUNK 01502
ITT 00602, 01602,
02002
ITV 00402, 02102
JENSEN 00602
JVC 00602, 00902,
01302
KAISUI 01402
KEC 00402, 02102
KENWOOD 00602, 01302
KLH 01402
KODAK 00302, 00402
KOLIN 00602, 00802
KORPEL 01402
LENCO 02102
LEYCO 01402
LG 00402, 00702,
00902, 02902
LLOYD’S 00002
LOEWE 00402, 01502,
04502
LOGIK 01402, 02002
LUXOR 00802, 01102,
01602
LXI 00402
M ELECTRONIC
00002
MAGNASONIC04302
MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302,
00502, 01502
MAGNIN 02002
MANESTH 00902, 01402
MARANTZ 00302, 01502
MARTA 00402
MATSUI 02602, 02702
MATSUSHITA 00302
MEDION 02602
MEI 00302
MEMOREX 00002, 00302,
00402, 00502,
01002, 01102,
01602, 02002,
02202, 02602,
04202
MEMPHIS 01402
METZ 00402, 02502,
04502
MGA 00802, 02002
MGN TECHNOLOGY
02002
MINOLTA 00702
MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802,
01302, 01502,
03502
MOTOROLA 00302, 01102
MTC 00002, 02002
MULTITECH 00002, 01402
MURPHY 00002
MYRYAD 01502
NAD 01602
NATIONAL 01902
NEC 00302, 00402,
00602, 01102,
01302, 01602
NECKERMANN
01502
NESCO 01402
NEWAVE 00402
NIKKO 00402
NOBLEX 02002
NOKIA 00602, 01602,
02002
NORDMENDE 00602, 02402
OCEANIC 00002, 00602
OKANO 02302, 02602
OLYMPUS 00302, 01902
OPTIMUS 00402, 01102,
01602, 02802
ORION 01702, 02602,
02702, 04402
OSAKI 00002, 00402,
01402
OTTO VERSAND
01502
PALLADIUM 00402, 00602,
01402
PANASONIC 00302, 01802,
01902, 03102,
03702, 04502
PATHE MARCONI
00602
PENNEY 00302, 00402,
00702, 02002,
03702, 04202
PENTAX 00702
PERDIO 00002
PHILCO 00302
PHILIPS 00302, 01502,
03202, 03902,
04002
PHONOLA 01502
PILOT 00402
PIONEER 00702, 01302,
01502
POLK AUDIO 01502
PROFITRONIC 02002
PROLINE 00002
PROSCAN 01202, 03802
PROTEC 01402
PULSAR 00502
PYE 01502
QUASAR 00302, 03702
QUELLE 01502
RADIOLA 01502
RADIOSHACK 00002
RADIX 00402
RANDEX 00402
RCA 00302, 00702,
01202, 02002,
03502, 03702,
03802
REALISTIC 00002, 00302,
00402, 01002,
01102, 01602
REOC 02602
REPLAYTV 03002, 03102
REX 00602
ROADSTAR 00402, 01402,
02002, 02102
RUNCO 00502
SABA 00602, 02402
SALORA 00802
SAMPO 00402, 01102
SAMSUNG 00902, 02002,
02802
SANKY 00502, 01102
SANSUI 00002, 00602,
01302, 04402
SANYO 01002, 01602,
02002
SAVILLE 02702
SBR 01502
SCHAUB LORENZ
00002, 00602,
01602
SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402,
01502
SCOTT 00802, 00902,
01702
SEARS 00002, 00302,
00402, 00702,
01002, 01602,
04202
SEG 02002
SEI 01502
SELECO 00602
SEMP 00902
SHARP 01102, 03502
SHINTOM 01402, 01602
SIEMENS 00402, 01502,
01602
SILVA 00402
SINGER 00902, 01402
SINUDYNE 01502
SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102
9
SONTEC 00402
SONY 00002, 00102,
00202, 00302,
03302, 04102
STS 00702
SUNKAI 02602
SUNSTAR 00002
SUNTRONIC 00002
SYLVANIA 00002, 00302,
00802, 01502
SYMPHONIC 00002
TANDY 00002, 01602
TASHIKO 00002, 00402
TATUNG 00002, 00602,
00902, 01302,
01502
TEAC 00002, 00602,
02102, 02202,
03402
TECHNICS 00302, 01902
TECO 00302, 00402,
00602, 01102
TEKNIKA 00002, 00302,
00402
TELEAVIA 00602
TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402
TENOSAL 01402
TENSAI 00002
THOMAS 00002
THOMSON 00602, 01202,
01302, 02402
THORN 00602, 01602
TIVO 03202, 03302
TMK 02002
TOSHIBA 00602, 00802,
00902, 01302,
01502, 03602
TOTEVISION 00402, 02002
UHER 02002
UNITECH 02002
UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402,
01502, 02002
VECTOR 00902
VICTOR 00602, 01302
VIDEO CONCEPTS
00902
VIDEOMAGIC 00402
VIDEOSONIC 02002
VILLAIN 00002
WARDS 00002, 00302,
00702, 01002,
01102, 01202,
01402, 01502,
02002
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
01402
XR-1000 00002, 00302,
01402
YAMAHA 00602
YAMISHI 01402
YOKAN 01402
YOKO 02002
ZENITH 00002, 00202,
00502, 04402
CABLE
ABC 00103, 00203
AMERICAST 02003
BELL SOUTH 02003
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
00803
BRITISH TELECOM
00103
DAERYUNG 00203, 01403,
01903
DIRECTOR 01303
FILMNET 01203
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
00103, 00803,
01303, 01703
GOLDSTAR 00503
HAMLIN 00303, 00703
JERROLD 00103, 00803,
01303, 01703
LG 00503
MEMOREX 00003
MNET 01203
MOTOROLA 00803, 01303,
01703, 02303
NOOS 01803
PACE 00603, 02203
PANASONIC 00003, 00203,
00403
PARAGON 00003
PHILIPS 01003, 01103
PIONEER 00503, 01603,
01903
PULSAR 00003
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
00103
QUASAR 00003
RCA 02403, 02503
REGAL 00703, 00903
RUNCO 00003
SAGEM 01803
SAMSUNG 00003, 00503
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
00203, 01403,
01903
SONY 02103
STARCOM 00103
SUPERCABLE 00803
TELE+1 01203
TORX 00103
TOSHIBA 00003
TRANS PX 00803
TS 00103
UNITED CABLE
00103
ZENITH 00003, 01503,
02003
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT 06404
ABSAT 00104
ALBA 01404
ALPHASTAR 02504
AMSTRAD 03004
ASTON 00304, 05004
ASTRO 00604
ATSAT 06404
AVALON 01304
BLAUPUNKT 00604
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
03004, 05204
CANAL DIGITAL
03104
CANAL SATELLITE
03104
CANAL+ 03104
CHAPARRAL 00804
CITYCOM 05304
CONNEXIONS 01304
CROSSDIGITAL
04604
CYRUS 00704
DAERYUNG 01304
DAEWOO 06304
D-BOX 02104, 04904
DIGENIUS 01104
DIRECTV 00904, 01204,
01504, 01704,
02204, 02304,
02804, 04104,
04604, 05104,
06904
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
02604, 03704
DISHPRO 02604, 03704
DISTRATEL 00004
DMT 04004
DNT 00704, 01304
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
05804
ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304,
01604, 02604,
03104, 03604,
03704, 04304
ENGEL 03804
EXPRESSVU 02604
FINLUX 01404
FOXTEL 07004, 07104,
07204, 07304,
07404
FRACARRO 03604
FTE 03404
FUBA 01304
GALAXIS 03404, 04704
GE 01504
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
03504
GOI 02604
GOLD BOX 03104
GRUNDIG 00604, 03004
HIRSCHMANN00604, 01304
HITACHI 01404, 02804
HTS 02604
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
02304, 05104,
06904
HUMAX 03404, 05304
INVIDEO 03604
JVC 02604
KATHREIN 00104, 00604,
00704, 01004,
01804, 05604
KREISELMEYER
00604
LABGEAR 06304
LOGIX 03804
LORENZEN 01104
MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204
MANHATTAN 01404, 03804,
04204
MARANTZ 00704
MEDIASAT 03104
MEMOREX 02204
METRONIC 00004
MITSUBISHI 02304
MOTOROLA 03504
MYRYAD 00704
NEXT LEVEL 03504
NOKIA 01404, 02104,
02404, 04904,
05704, 06804
OCTALTV 03704
ORBITECH 04504
PACE 01404, 03004,
05204, 06604
PANASONIC 00904, 01904,
03004, 06504
PANDA 01404
PAYSAT 02204
PHILIPS 00204, 00704,
01404, 02004,
02204, 02304,
03104, 04104,
05104, 06904
PIONEER 03104
PROMAX 01404
PROSCAN 01204, 01504
RADIOLA 00704
RADIOSHACK 03504
RADIX 01304
RCA 00404, 01204,
01504, 03204
RFT 00704
SABRE 01404
SAGEM 02904, 04804,
05904
SAMSUNG 03804, 04604,
06004, 06204
SAT CONTROL06404
SATSTATION 04204
SCHWAIGER 04704
SEEMANN 01304
SIEMENS 00604
SKY 03004, 03304,
05204
SM ELECTRONIC
05404
SONY 01704, 03004,
06704
STAR CHOICE 03504
STRONG 06404
TANTEC 01404
TECHNISAT 04404, 04504
TELESTAR 04504
THOMSON 01404, 03104,
03904, 06104
TOPFIELD 05504
TOSHIBA 02304, 02704,
06904
TPS 02904, 05904
ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704
UNIDEN 02004, 02204
UNIVERSUM 00604
VENTANA 00704
WISI 00604, 01304,
01404
XSAT 00104
ZEHNDER 04004
ZENITH 03304
CD PLAYER
AIWA 00605
ARCAM 00605
AUDIO RESEARCH
00605
AUDIO TON 00605
AUDIOLAB 00605
AUDIOMECA 00605
CAIRN 00605
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
00205
CARVER 00605, 00805
CYRUS 00605
DENON 01005
DKK 00005
DMX ELECTRONICS
00605
DYNAMIC BASS
00805
EMERSON 00905
FISHER 00805
GENEXXA 00305, 00905
GOODMANS 00905
GRUNDIG 00605
HARMAN/KARDON
00605, 00705
HITACHI 00305
JVC 00505
KENWOOD 00105, 00405
KRELL 00605
LINN 00605
LXI 00905
MAGNAVOX 00605, 00905
MARANTZ 00205, 00605
MATSUI 00605
MCS 00205
MEMOREX 00905
MERIDIAN 00605
MICROMEGA 00605
MIRO 00005
MISSION 00605
MYRYAD 00605
10
NAD 00005
NAIM 00605
NSM 00605
OPTIMUS 00005, 00305,
00405, 00805,
00905
PANASONIC 00205
PHILIPS 00605
PIONEER 00305, 00905
POLK AUDIO 00605
PROTON 00605
QED 00605
QUAD 00605
QUASAR 00205
RCA 00305, 00805,
00905
REALISTIC 00805
REVOX 00605
ROTEL 00605
SAE 00605
SANSUI 00605, 00905
SANYO 00805
SCOTT 00905
SEARS 00905
SHARP 00405
SIMAUDIO 00605
SONIC FRONTIERS
00605
SONY 00005
SYMPHONIC 00905
TAG MCL AR EN
00605
TANDY 00305
TECHNICS 00205
THORENS 00605
THULE 00605
UNIVERSUM 00605
VICTOR 00505
WARDS 00605
YAMAHA 01105, 01205
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD 01305
MARANTZ 01305
PHILIPS 01305
YAMAHA 01405
BLU-RAY/DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
02806
ALBA 02606
AMSTRAD 02306
APEX DIGITAL02106, 02606,
03006, 03506,
03606, 03706,
04106
BLAUPINKT 02606
BLUE PARADE01006
BUSH 02306
CENTREX 02106
CLATRONIC 03406
CYBERHOME 02406
DAEWOO 03206, 03306
DANSAI 03206
DECCA 03206
DENON 00006
DIAMOND 03106
DIGITREX 02106
DVD2000 00206
EMERSON 01206
ENTERPRISE 01206
FISHER 02006
GE 00306, 02606
GO VIDEO 02506
GOLDSTAR 02906, 04906
GRADIENTE 01806
GREENHILL 02606
GRUNDIG 00706
HITACHI 01106, 01507,
01906
HITEKER 02106
JVC 00906, 01306
KENWOOD 00006, 00606
KLH 02606
KOSS 01806
LG 02906
LIMIT 03106
MAGNAVOX 00106, 02206
MARANTZ 00706
MEMOREX 03806
MICO 02706
MICROSOFT 00306
MINTEK 02606
MITSUBISHI 00206
MUSTEK 02806
NESA 02606
ONKYO 00106, 04806
ORITRON 01806
PALSONIC 02106
PANASONIC 00006, 00007,
00107, 00207,
01606, 04206,
05006
PHILIPS 00106, 00706,
00807, 01706,
03906, 05206
PIONEER 00406, 00407,
00507, 00607,
01006, 01506,
01606, 05306
POLK AUDIO 00706
PROSCAN 00306
QWESTAR 01806
RCA 00306, 01006,
02606, 04806
ROTEL 01306
SAMSUNG 01106, 04506
SANYO 02006
SHARP 01207, 01307,
01406
SHERWOOD 03206
SHINSONIC 00506
SLIM ART 03306
SM ELECTRONIC
02806
SONY 00506, 00907,
01007, 01107,
04006, 05106
SYLVANIA 02206
TATUNG 03206
TEAC 01006, 02606
TECHNICS 00006
THETA DIGITAL
01006
THOMSON 00306
TOSHIBA 00106, 00307,
04606, 04806,
05406
URBAN CONCEPTS
00106
VICTOR 01407
XBOX 00306
YAMAHA 00006, 00706,
00707, 00806,
04306, 04406,
04706
ZENITH 00106, 01206,
02906
ZEUS 03306
LD PLAYER
CARVER 00108
DENON 00008
MARANTZ 00108
MITSUBISHI 00008
NAD 00008
NAGSMI 00008
OPTIMUS 00008
PHILIPS 00108
PIONEER 00008
SALORA 00108
SONY 00208
TELEFUNKEN 00008
YAMAHA 00308
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 00109
ONKYO 00309
SHARP 00209
SONY 00009
YAMAHA 00409, 00509,
00609
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC 00710
AIWA 00410, 01210,
03610, 03910,
04410
ALCO 03810
ANAM 04310
APEX DIGITAL01810
AUDIOLAB 01510
AUDIOTRONIC01510
AUDIOVOX 03810
BOSE 01610
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
03310
CAPETRONIC 00710
CARVER 01210, 01510
CENTREX 01810
DENON 03210
FERGUSON 00710
FINE ARTS 01510
GRUNDIG 01510
HARMAN/KARDON
00210, 02610
INTEGRA 00310, 02510
JBL 00210, 02710
JVC 00110, 00710,
03410, 04110
KENWOOD 01010, 03010
KLH 03810, 04010
MAGNAVOX 00710, 01210,
01510, 02110
MARANTZ 00010, 01210,
01510, 02410
MCS 00010
MICROMEGA 01510
MUSICMAGIC 01210
MYRYAD 01510
NAD 00610
NORCENT 03710
ONKYO 00310, 00810,
02510
OPTIMUS 00710, 00910
PANASONIC 00010, 02310,
04210, 04710
PHILIPS 01210, 01510,
01910, 02010,
02110, 02210,
02410
PIONEER 00710, 00910,
03510
POLK AUDIO 02410
PROSCAN 01710
QUASAR 00010
RCA 00710, 00910,
01710, 03810,
04310
SABA 00710
SANSUI 01210
SCHNEIDER 00710
SONY 00410, 01110,
01310, 04510,
04610
STEREOPHONICS
00910
SUNFIRE 03010
TEAC 03810
TECHNICS 00010, 02810,
02910, 04210
TELEFUNKEN 00710
THOMSON 01710
THORENS 01510
UHER 00710
VENTURER 03810
VICTOR 00110
WARDS 00410
YAMAHA 00510, 01410,
03110, 04810,
05510, 05610,
05710, 05810,
05910, 06010
YAMAHA (iPOD)
05310
YAMAHA (NET)
05410
TAPE DECK
AIWA 00111
CARVER 00111
GRUNDIG 00111
HARMAN/KARDON
00111
MAGNAVOX 00111
MARANTZ 00111
MYRYAD 00111
OPTIMUS 00011
PHILIPS 00111
PIONEER 00011
POLK AUDIO 00111
RCA 00011
REVOX 00111
SANSUI 00111
SONY 00211
THORENS 00111
WARDS 00011
YAMAHA 00311, 00411
11
Information about software
Information sur le logiciel
Information über Software
Information om programvara
Informazioni sul software
Información sobre software
Informatie over software
Информация о программном обеспечении
软件的信息
소프트웨어 관련 정보
This product uses the following software.
For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated below.
■ About The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG
software
The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software
README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998
This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group’s free
JPEG software. You are welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any
purpose, subject to the conditions under LEGAL ISSUES, below.
Serious users of this software (particularly those incorporating it into larger programs)
should contact IJG at jpeg[email protected] to be added to our electronic mailing list.
Mailing list members are notified of updates and have a chance to participate in
technical discussions, etc.
This software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Boucher, Lee Crocker,
Julian Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding,
Ge’ Weijers, and other members of the Independent JPEG Group.
IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards committee.
DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP
This file contains the following sections:
OVERVIEW General description of JPEG and the IJG software.
LEGAL ISSUES Copyright, lack of warranty, terms of distribution.
REFERENCES Where to learn more about JPEG.
ARCHIVE LOCATIONS Where to find newer versions of this software.
RELATED SOFTWARE Other stuff you should get.
FILE FORMAT WARS Software *not* to get.
TO DO Plans for future IJG releases.
Other documentation files in the distribution are:
User documentation:
install.doc How to configure and install the IJG software.
usage.doc Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom,
and wrjpgcom.
*.1 Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as
usage.doc).
wizard.doc Advanced usage instructions for JPEG wizards only.
change.log Version-to-version change highlights.
Programmer and internal documentation:
libjpeg.doc How to use the JPEG library in your own programs.
example.c Sample code for calling the JPEG library.
structure.doc Overview of the JPEG library’s internal structure.
filelist.doc Road map of IJG files.
coderules.doc Coding style rules --- please read if you contribute code.
Please read at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Useful information can also be
found in the JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article. See ARCHIVE
LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ article.
If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we suggest reading one or more of
the REFERENCES, then looking at the documentation files (in roughly the order listed)
before diving into the code.
OVERVIEW
This package contains C software to implement JPEG image compression and
decompression. JPEG (pronounced “jay-peg”) is a standardized compression method for
full-color and gray-scale images. JPEG is intended for compressing “real-world” scenes;
line drawings, cartoons and other non-realistic images are not its strong suit. JPEG is
lossy, meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the input image. Hence
you must not use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. However, on typical
photographic images, very good compression levels can be obtained with no visible
change, and remarkably high compression levels are possible if you can tolerate a low-
quality image. For more details, see the references, or just experiment with various
compression settings.
This software implements JPEG baseline, extended-sequential, and progressive
compression processes. Provision is made for supporting all variants of these processes,
although some uncommon parameter settings aren’t implemented yet. For legal reasons,
we are not distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of JPEG; see LEGAL
ISSUES. We have made no provision for supporting the hierarchical or lossless
processes defined in the standard.
We provide a set of library routines for reading and writing JPEG image files, plus two
sample applications “cjpeg” and “djpeg”, which use the library to perform conversion
between JPEG and some other popular image file formats. The library is intended to be
reused in other applications.
In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we have included considerable
functionality beyond the bare JPEG coding/decoding capability; for example, the color
quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding, but they are essential for
output to colormapped file formats or colormapped displays. These extra functions can
be compiled out of the library if not required for a particular application. We have also
included “jpegtran”, a utility for lossless transcoding between different JPEG processes,
and “rdjpgcom” and “wrjpgcom”, two simple applications for inserting and extracting
textual comments in JFIF files.
The emphasis in designing this software has been on achieving portability and
flexibility, while also making it fast enough to be useful. In particular, the software is not
intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG. (See the REFERENCES section for
introductory material.) Rather, it is intended to be reliable, portable, industrial-strength
code. We do not claim to have achieved that goal in every aspect of the software, but we
strive for it.
We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. No
royalty is required, but we do ask for an acknowledgement in product documentation, as
described under LEGAL ISSUES.
LEGAL ISSUES
In plain English:
1. We don’t promise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs, please let us
know!)
2. You can use this software for whatever you want. You don’t have to pay us.
3. You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you
must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you’ve used the IJG
code.
In legalese:
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with
respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular
purpose. This software is provided “AS IS”, and you, its user, assume the entire risk as
to its quality and accuracy.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or
portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:
12
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file
must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any
additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must
state that “this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG
Group”.
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full
responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY
for damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just
to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author’s name or company name in
advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This
software may be referred to only as “the Independent JPEG Group’s software”.
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial
products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product
vendor.
ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole
proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA.
ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the
usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, that you must
include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.)
However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG
code, this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do.
The Unix configuration script “configure” was produced with GNU Autoconf. It is
copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable. The same holds
for its supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support
script, install-sh, is copyright by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable.
It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents
owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used
without obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, support for arithmetic coding
has been removed from the free JPEG software. (Since arithmetic coding provides only
a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many
implementations will support it.) So far as we are aware, there are no patent restrictions
on the remaining code.
The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid
entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has been removed
altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce “uncompressed GIFs”.
This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than
usual, but are readable by all standard GIF decoders.
We are required to state that
“The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of CompuServe
Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated.”
REFERENCES
We highly recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to
understand the innards of the JPEG software.
The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is
Wallace, Gregory K. “The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard”,
Communications of the ACM, April 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp. 30-44.
(Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion picture compression, applications
of JPEG, and related topics.) If you don’t have the CACM issue handy, a PostScript file
containing a revised version of Wallace’s article is available at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/
jpeg/wallace.ps.gz. The file (actually a preprint for an article that appeared in IEEE
Trans. Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in CACM, but it
includes corrections and some added material. Note: the Wallace article is copyright
ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used for commercial purposes.
A somewhat less technical, more leisurely introduction to JPEG can be found in “The
Data Compression Book” by Mark Nelson and Jean-loup Gailly, published by M&T
Books (New York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. This book provides good
explanations and example C code for a multitude of compression methods including
JPEG. It is an excellent source if you are comfortable reading C code but don’t know
much about data compression in general. The book’s JPEG sample code is far from
industrial-strength, but when you are ready to look at a full implementation, you’ve got
one here...
The best full description of JPEG is the textbook “JPEG Still Image Data Compression
Standard” by William B. Pennebaker and Joan L. Mitchell, published by Van Nostrand
Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price US$59.95, 638 pp.
The book includes the complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft
DIS 10918-2). This is by far the most complete exposition of JPEG in existence, and we
highly recommend it.
The JPEG standard itself is not available electronically; you must order a paper copy
through ISO or ITU. (Unless you feel a need to own a certified official copy, we
recommend buying the Pennebaker and Mitchell book instead; it’s much cheaper and
includes a great deal of useful explanatory material.)
In the USA, copies of the standard may be ordered from ANSI Sales at (212)642-4900,
or from Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179. (ANSI doesn’t take credit
card orders, but Global does.) It’s not cheap: as of 1992, ANSI was charging $95 for Part
1 and $47 for Part 2, plus 7% shipping/handling. The standard is divided into two parts,
Part 1 being the actual specification, while Part 2 covers compliance testing methods.
Part 1 is titled “Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part
1: Requirements and guidelines” and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-
T T.81. Part 2 is titled “Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still
Images, Part 2: Compliance testing” and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-2,
ITU-T T.83.
Some extensions to the original JPEG standard are defined in JPEG Part 3, a newer ISO
standard numbered ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T.84. IJG currently does not support
any Part 3 extensions.
The JPEG standard does not specify all details of an interchangeable file format. For the
omitted details we follow the “JFIF” conventions, revision 1.02. A copy of the JFIF spec
is available from:
Literature Department
C-Cube Microsystems, Inc.
1778 McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, CA 95035
phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314
A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at
ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.ps.gz. There is also a plain text version at
ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figures.
The TIFF 6.0 file format specification can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/
graphics/tiff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPEG incorporation scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec
of 3-June-92 has a number of serious problems. IJG does not recommend use of the
TIFF 6.0 design (TIFF Compression tag 6). Instead, we recommend the JPEG design
proposed by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compression tag 7). Copies of this Note can be
obtained from ftp.sgi.com or from ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. It is expected that the
next revision of the TIFF spec will replace the 6.0 JPEG design with the Note’s design.
Although IJG’s own code does not support TIFF/JPEG, the free libtiff library uses our
library to implement TIFF/JPEG per the Note. libtiff is available from
ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/.
ARCHIVE LOCATIONS
The “official” archive site for this software is ftp.uu.net (Internet address 192.48.96.9).
The most recent released version can always be found there in directory graphics/jpeg.
This particular version will be archived as
ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz. If you don’t have direct Internet access,
UUNET’s archives are also available via UUCP; contact [email protected] for
information on retrieving files that way.
Numerous Internet sites maintain copies of the UUNET files. However, only ftp.uu.net
is guaranteed to have the latest official version.
You can also obtain this software in DOS-compatible “zip” archive format from the
SimTel archives (ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/graphics/), or on CompuServe
in the Graphics Support forum (GO CIS:GRAPHSUP), library 12 “JPEG Tools”. Again,
these versions may sometimes lag behind the ftp.uu.net release.
The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a useful source of general
information about JPEG. It is updated constantly and therefore is not included in this
distribution. The FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet newsgroups
comp.graphics.misc, news.answers, and other groups. It is available on the World Wide
Web at http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news.answers archive sites,
including the official news.answers archive at rtfm.mit.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/
usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/.
If you don’t have Web or FTP access, send e-mail to [email protected] with
body
send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part1
send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part2
RELATED SOFTWARE
Numerous viewing and image manipulation programs now support JPEG. (Quite a few
of them use this library to do so.) The JPEG FAQ described above lists some of the more
popular free and shareware viewers, and tells where to obtain them on Internet.
If you are on a Unix machine, we highly recommend Jef Poskanzer’s free PBMPLUS
software, which provides many useful operations on PPM-format image files. In
particular, it can convert PPM images to and from a wide range of other formats, thus
making cjpeg/djpeg considerably more useful. The latest version is distributed by the
NetPBM group, and is available from numerous sites, notably ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/
graphics/graphics/packages/NetPBM/.
Unfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly as portable as the IJG software is; you
are likely to have difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine.
A different free JPEG implementation, written by the PVRG group at Stanford, is
available from ftp://havefun.stanford.edu/pub/jpeg/. This program is designed for
research and experimentation rather than production use; it is slower, harder to use, and
less portable than the IJG code, but it is easier to read and modify. Also, the PVRG code
supports lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the other hand, it doesn’t do progressive
JPEG.)
FILE FORMAT WARS
Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible with our library. The root of
the problem is that the ISO JPEG committee failed to specify a concrete file format.
Some vendors “filled in the blanks” on their own, creating proprietary formats that no
one else could read. (For example, none of the early commercial JPEG implementations
for the Macintosh were able to exchange compressed files.)
13
The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). This format has
been agreed to by a number of major commercial JPEG vendors, and it has become the
de facto standard. JFIF is a minimal or “low end” representation. We recommend the use
of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF revision 6.0 as modified by TIFF Technical Note #2) for “high
end” applications that need to record a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG
is fairly new and not yet widely supported, unfortunately.
The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format called SPIFF. SPIFF is
interoperable with JFIF, in the sense that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the
most common variant of SPIFF. SPIFF has some technical advantages over JFIF, but its
major claim to fame is simply that it is an official standard rather than an informal one.
At this point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or whether JFIF will
remain the de-facto standard. IJG intends to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen,
but we have not decided whether it should become our default output format or not. (In
any case, our decoder will remain capable of reading JFIF indefinitely.)
Various proprietary file formats incorporating JPEG compression also exist. We have
little or no sympathy for the existence of these formats. Indeed, one of the original
reasons for developing this free software was to help force convergence on common,
open format standards for JPEG files. Don’t use a proprietary file format!
TO DO
The major thrust for v7 will probably be improvement of visual quality. The current
method for scaling the quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q values.
We also intend to investigate block boundary smoothing, “poor man’s variable
quantization”, and other means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance without
sacrificing compatibility.
In future versions, we are considering supporting some of the upcoming JPEG Part 3
extensions --- principally, variable quantization and the SPIFF file format.
As always, speeding things up is of great interest.
Please send bug reports, offers of help, etc. to [email protected].
■ About PNG Reference Library
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.29, May 8, 2008, are Copyright (c)
2004, 2006-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Cosmin Truta
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer
and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or
against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill
any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults,
and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with
the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c)
1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88,
with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995,
1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the
following set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The Contributing Authors and Group
42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the
warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary,
or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library,
even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented
as being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered
source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and
encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format
in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not
required but would be appreciated.
■ About zlib Library
Copyright notice:
(C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided ’as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event
will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that
you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an
acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not
required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler
If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy
legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any
kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does
not include third-party code.
If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file
ChangeLog history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for
more information on the distribution of modified source versions.
Printed in Malaysia WQ21740
© 2008 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.
Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung.
Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen.
I manuali e le lettere dell’alfabeto corrispondono a quelli nel Manuale di istruzioni.
Los números y las letras en el interior de círculos se corresponden con aquellos del manual de instrucciones.
De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing.
Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации.
带圆圈的数字和文字与说明书中的同类数字和文字相对应。
원 번호 및 원 알파벳은 사용 설명서 안의 표기와 일치합니다 .
■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Pannello anteriore/Panel delantero/Voorpaneel/
Фронтальная панель/ 前部面板 / 전변 패널
DSP-Z7
RTKBGLE
LEVEL
MULTI ZONE
MASTER
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
MIC
OPTIMIZER
YPAO
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
ON/OFF
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO SELECT/
REC OUT
PROGRAM
RL
OPTICAL
HDMI IN
USB
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MENU ENTER
NEXT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
1
ZONE 2
2
SYSTEM MEMORY
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
3
ZONE 4
4
INFO
ZONE CONTROLS
TONE
CONTROL
MILJK
BHAGE
FDC
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/
Telecomando/Mando a distancia/Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ/ 遥控器 / 리모콘
WQ21720
Printed in Malaysia
ZONE
SETUP ID
MACRO
MODE
DVD CD
V-AUX DOCKMULTI
PHONO
AV
POWER
TV
POWER
TV DVR VCR
TUNER
BD
HD DVD
MD
CD-R
USB
NET
CBL
SAT
SRCH MODE
MENU
BAND
TITLE
STATUS
MEMORY
SUBMENU
RETURN
PLAY INFO
DISPLAY
MUTE
4
3
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
3D DSP
STANDBY
POWER
SELECT
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A-E
CLASSICAL
1
LIVE/CLUB
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
STEREO
5
ENHANCER
6
SUR.DECODE
7
STRAIGHT
8
PURE DIRECT
ENT
AUDIO SEL
AUDIO
SLEEP
TV
PARTY
MUTE
INPUT
9 0
HDMI OUT
LEVEL
TV CH
INFO
TV VOL
EXTD SUR.
10
REC
AMP
TV
SOURCE
BA
CLASSICAL
1
LIVE/CLUB
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
STEREO
5
ENHANCER
6
HDMI OUT
0
SUR.DECODE
7
STRAIGHT
8
1
M
N
O
P
2
3
4
8
5
6
9
0
A
B
C
SR t
Q
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
7
-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha DSP-Z7 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha DSP-Z7 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha DSP-Z7 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha DSP-Z7 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha DSP-Z7 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha DSP-Z7 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha DSP-Z7 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha DSP-Z7 Omistajan opas
- svenska: Yamaha DSP-Z7 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha DSP-Z7 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha DSP-Z7 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde papieren
-
Yamaha DSP-Z11 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V765 de handleiding
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V765BL de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX V3900 - AV Network Receiver Handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-V3800 de handleiding
-
Yamaha HTR-6280 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver de handleiding
Andere documenten
-
Pioneer SBX-B30 Handleiding
-
Sharp CP-SS30(BK) de handleiding
-
Lenco LPJ-500BU de handleiding
-
Samsung HT-H5200 Handleiding
-
-
-
Mitsubishi Electric DX-VS1UE Setup Manual
-
Philips 15L5082Q Handleiding
-
Rockville RVD12HD-BK v2 de handleiding
-
Pioneer IDK-01 de handleiding